The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutSPECIFICATIONS - 18-00084 - 525 S Center St - Kimball ChillerTABLE OF CONTENTS 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT FOR TAYLOR BUILDING KIMBALL BUILDING DATA CENTER CENTRAL ENERGY FACILITY AT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG, IDAHO TABLE OF CONTENTS AUTHORITY PAGES Approvals .................................................................................................................. 1 List of Consultants ..................................................................................................... 1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Invitation To Bid ......................................................................................................... 1 Notice To Bidders ....................................................................................................... 1 Instructions to Bidders ................................................................................................ 4 Form of Proposal........................................................................................................ 1 Construction Management Services Agreement Between Owner and Contractor ...................................................... 3 General Conditions Table of Contents General Conditions .......................................................................................... 13 Supplementary Conditions ................................................................................. 6 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Division 01 – General Section 011100 - Scope of the Project ....................................................................... 2 Section 012300 - Alternates ....................................................................................... 2 Section 013119 - Project Meetings ............................................................................ 3 Section 013200 - Schedules, Reports, Payments ...................................................... 4 Section 014000 - Quality Control Services ................................................................. 1 Section 014216 - Definitions and Standards .............................................................. 5 Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities ...................................................................... 5 Section 017000 - Project Closeout ............................................................................. 4 Division 02- Civil Section 024119 - Selective Demolition ...................................................................... 6 Section 027500 - Concrete for Exterior Improvements .............................................. 9 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT FOR TAYLOR BUILDING KIMBALL BUILDING DATA CENTER CENTRAL ENERGY FACILITY AT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG, IDAHO OWNER PROJECT NO: 11489 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Prepared by HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY 377 West 800 North Salt Lake City, Utah 84103 DECEMBER 4, 2017 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 23 – Mechanical Section 230000 - General Mechanical Requirements ................................................ 8 Section 230100 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals ............................................ 3 Section 230205 - Demolition ...................................................................................... 2 Section 230513 - Motors, Drives, and Electrical Requirements ................................. 9 Section 230519 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges ............................................ 4 Section 230523 - Valves ............................................................................................ 4 Section 230529 - Mechanical Supporting Devices ..................................................... 8 Section 230548 - Mechanical Seismic Control ........................................................... 3 Section 230553 - Mechanical Identification ................................................................ 2 Section 230293 - Testing, Adjusting, Balancing ....................................................... 10 Section 230700 - Mechanical Insulation .................................................................... 9 Section 230900 - Mechanical Control Systems .......................................................... 8 Section 230923 - Direct Digital Control Systems ....................................................... 5 Section 232000 - General Pipes and Fittings ........................................................... 10 Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties .................................................... 5 Section 232123 - HVAC Pumps ................................................................................. 5 Section 232500 - Chemical Water Treatment ............................................................ 1 Section 236400 - Air Cooled Chillers ....................................................................... 15 Section 236533 - Dry Coolers .................................................................................... 5 Section 237119 - Ice Storage Units ........................................................................... 5 Division 26 – Electrical Section 260501 - Common Electrical Requirements .................................................. 3 Section 260502 - Electrical Demolition Requirements ............................................... 1 Section 260519 - Line Voltage Conductors and Cable .............................................. 2 Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems .............................. 3 Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems ................................... 5 Section 260553 - Electrical Identification .................................................................. 2 Section 262816 - Disconnect Switches ...................................................................... 2 Section 262913 - Motor Starters ................................................................................ 3 Divisions 31 – Earthwork Section 311000 - Site Clearing .................................................................................. 4 Section 312000 - Earth Moving ............................................................................... 11 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT ----------------------------------------------------------------------- CONSULTANTS HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 377 West 800 North Salt Lake City, UT 84103 KELLER AND ASSOCIATES CIVIL ENGINEERS 305 North 3rd, Suite A Pocatello, Idaho 83201 PAYNE ENGINEERING ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS 1823 E. Center Pocatello, ID 83201 Rulon Nielsen Director, Arch and Con Management Services | Phone: (208) 496-2660 | Fax: (208) 496-2490 | nielsenru@byui.edu 12.06.2017 Contractor Re:Invitation to Bid – 18-Chiller Replacement Project No. – 11489 To Whom It May Concern: Please submit a bid on the above-referenced project. The project consists of the following: Three air cooled water chiller replacements: one at the Taylor Building, one at the Kimball Building and one at the Central Energy facility. The contract award will follow the University’s standard approval process and construction may begin on 01.15.2018. Construction will complete no later than 07.31.2018. A mandatory pre-bid meeting will occur 12.12.2017 at 10:00 AM, in Big-D Construction Job Trailer located at BYU-I Austin Building. You will submit your bid online via e-Builder no later than 01.03.2018 at 4:00 PM. A bid tabulation summary will be emailed to all bidders the following business day. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of the contract will be required for any bid proposal over $40,000. We hope you will be able to submit a bid. Sincerely, Rulon Nielsen Director, Architecture and Construction Management Services RRN/nm Updated 8//17 1 Notice to Bidders NOTICE TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 – PROJECT: Project Name: 18-Chiller Replacement Project Number: 11489 SECTION 2 – LOCATION: BYU-Idaho Main Campus SECTION 3 – OWNER: BYU-Idaho SECTION 4 – DESIGNER: Heath Engineering Company SECTION 5 – STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements (January 2015). This volume is an integral part of the contract documents and is hereby made a part of the contract. SECTION 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION: Date: 07.31.2018 SECTION 7 – PREBID CONFERENCE: Date: 12.12.2017 Time: 10:00 AM Place: Big-D Construction Job Trailer located at BYU-I Austin Building SECTION 8 – RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: Date: 01.03.2018 Time: 4:00 PM Place: e-Builder The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project. SECTION 9 – GENERAL CONTRACTORS: Bidding by General Contractors will be by invitation only. SECTION 10 – DRAWINGS: Drawings are available through e-Builder. END OF NOTICE TO BIDDERS Updated 8/17 1 Instructions to Bidders INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION A.Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting consideration for such invitation shall apply to: Architecture and Construction Management Services BYU-Idaho 283 University Operations Building Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 B.The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids. SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.The Contract documents may be obtained by the Contractor from: e-Builder B.Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by contacting the invited Contractor. SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD A.All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted by the Owner from prime contractors only. SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any of the Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing through e-Builder. Any interpretations or corrections will be made only by written addenda duly issued by the Owner through e- Builder. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect through e-Builder at least five (5) days before bid opening. Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity. B.Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in its bid. SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS A.The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions. SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS A.To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions: Updated 8/17 2 Instructions to Bidders 1.Bids shall be prepared on the BYU-Idaho Form of Proposal. All pages including the subcontractor list shall be submitted at the time of bid. 2.Bids shall have all items or blanks filled. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures. If there is a discrepancy between the two, the written number shall govern. 3.Bids shall be without interlineations, alterations or erasures. 4.Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract. 5.The Bidder's legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated. 6.Neither oral bids nor modifications shall be considered. 7.All bids will be submitted and received through e-Builder®. No exceptions. 8.It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. e-Builder will not accept late bids. 9.Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner. It will be assumed that the question of bonding subcontractors, where considered desirable or necessary by the Contractor, including the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted. 10.In order for the bid to be considered valid, two or more Bidders bidding as a "joint venture" must have the written approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members of a joint venture shall sign the bid and an official representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal. 11.The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding any alternates or substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the awarded contractor based on the sum of the base bid and alternates accepted. 12.Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. In determining the awarded contractor, the Owner will not consider substitutes. 13.Bids may be withdrawn by the Bidder, either in person or by a written request before bid opening. Once a bid summary is distributed to all Bidders, the Bidders will have 24-hours to review and withdraw their bids. After the 24-hour period, the bids may not be withdrawn and must remain fixed as submitted for 45 days after opening. 14.Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the Owner’s Project Management Software, e-Builder®, including, but not limited to; RFI’s, change orders, potential change orders, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as directed by Owner. SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS A.As soon after the bid opening as is practicable, the Owner will interview the awarded contractor and if deemed necessary, the second or third Bidders. The Owner will also examine the list of subcontractors submitted with the bids. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontract proposal. B.If a Bidder doubts the correctness or acceptability of any subcontract proposal, the Bidder may submit the names and amount of other competing subcontractors for consideration, making sure that he clearly states which one he has used in formulating his proposal. SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID A.The Bidder's and subcontractor's past performance, organization, equipment and ability to perform and complete their contract as specified will be vital elements, as well as the amount of their bids, in the award of the Contract. Updated 8/17 3 Instructions to Bidders B.The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. The Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner regardless of whether such bid is the lowest. SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A.Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in the Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant consideration. However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered. B.Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect at least five days before bid opening. The requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly documented. The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity. C.Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for prior approval items. D.Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in an addendum. E.The Contractor's "base bid" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified or which have received prior approval by addendum. F.Substitutions: Besides the "base bid," any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the Owner. This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form. G.Any proposed substitute submitted by a Bidder shall include the amount by which the "base bid" would be increased or decreased. H.The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. In determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider substitutes. I.If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the Contractor at his own expense to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory. SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT A.A copy of the form of the Contract the successful Bidder will be required to execute is included in this specification. SECTION 11 -- ADDENDA A.All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract. SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT A.Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Owner: Updated 8/17 4 Instructions to Bidders 1.Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract sum as specified in the General Conditions. 2.Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions. 3.A cost breakdown of the work that may, as approved by the Owner, serve as a basis for making monthly payments to the Contractor. 4.A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least biweekly and updated as required. A critical path method of scheduling is preferred. If the Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule, this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's Representative before the Contractor submits the first payment request. B.The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers is required within fourteen (14) days of the Owner’s subcontractor review. SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Updated 8/17 1 Form of Proposal BYU-Idaho FORM OF PROPOSAL NAME OF PROJECT 18-Chiller Replacement PROJECT NUMBER 11489 NAME OF CONTRACTOR DATE OF PROPOSAL The undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or exist relating to the proposed work for the 18-Chiller Replacement project prepared by Heath Engineering Company. l.That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above-entitled project. 2.That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements, revised January 2015. 3.That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work. 4.That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon. 5.That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds, insurance coverage and all other items required by the contract documents. 6.The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits necessary for the completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of: Base Bid ($) Unit Price(s): None Allowance(s): Updated 8/17 2 Form of Proposal None Alternate(s): No. 1 Working with Calmac, to rebuild the 8 existing Ice Storage Units. Replace the branch piping, valves, flex connections, etc. serving the 8 existing Ice Storage Units. No. 2 Replace the 8 existing Ice Storage Units with 8 new Ice Storage Units. Replace the branch piping, valves, flex connections, etc. serving the 8 new Ice Storage Units. AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL: l.The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before 07.31.2018. 2.The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s). 3.The Bidder’s contractor’s license number is . 4.Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes____No____ 5.For verification call . Telephone Number . 6.Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes____No____ PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for in the contract documents as a base bid. Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is referred to the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, Prior Approvals and Substitutions for requirements relative to proposed substitutions. Proposed Substitute Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers $ Add $ Deduct Updated 8/17 3 Form of Proposal Proposed Substitute Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers $ Add $ Deduct Updated 8/17 4 Form of Proposal TYPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION: Official Name of Organization Corporation, Co-partnership, Individual, or Other Address Name of Individual Members of Firm Name of President of Corporation Name of Secretary of Corporation Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Signature ( ) )Seal(Title or Office ( ) Legal Address Updated 8/17 5 Form of Proposal BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS) NAME OF PROJECT: 18-Chiller Replacement PROJECT NUMBER: 11489 OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho DI V . SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR USED AMOUNT Rulon Nielsen Director, Construction Management Services | Phone: (208) 496-2650 | Fax: (208) 496-2490 | nielsenru@byui.edu AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds) Brigham Young University-Idaho, a non-profit Idaho corporation, (“Owner”) and «Company_Name» (“Contractor”) hereby enter into this Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (“Agreement”) and agree as follows: 1. Project. Project Name: «Project_Name» (“Project”) Project Number: «ProjectCustom_ProjectNumber» 2. Scope of Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. a. The Contract Documents consist of: 1) This Agreement; 2) The General Conditions (Special Project Major Cost Plus a Fee with GMP / Bonds—U.S.) (“General Conditions”) contained in the Project Manual titled «ProcessFields_TitleOfSpecifications» and dated «ProcessFields_DatesofSpecifications» prepared by «ProcessFields_CompanyNamePreparingSpecif» (“Architect”); 3) The Supplementary Conditions (Special Project Major Cost Plus a Fee with GMP / Bonds—U.S.) contained in the above-referenced Project Manual; 4) The Specifications contained in the above-referenced Project Manual; 5) The Drawings prepared by Architect entitled «ProcessFields_TitleOfDrawings» – Construction Documents, dated «ProcessFields_DatesofDrawings»; 6) Addendum Number(s) «ProcessFields_AddendaNumbers» dated «ProcessFields_AddendumDates» respectively; and 7) All Modifications to the Contract Documents. b. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. c. The definitions set forth in the General Conditions will apply to the Contract Documents. d. The Contract Documents contain the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersede al prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. e. Modifications or other amendments to the Contract Documents must be in writing and as provided in the General Conditions. 4. Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion. a. Contractor will commence the Work on the date for commencement set forth in the Written Notice to proceed form Owner to Contractor. b. Contractor will achieve Substantial Completion and have the Work ready for Owner’s inspection no later than «ProcessFields_MaterialCompletionDate», as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Time is of the essence of the Contract Documents. 5. Contract Sum. a. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents the Contract Sum consisting of: 1) The Cost of the Work as defined in the General Conditions; plus 2) The Contractor’s Fee which will be «ProcessFields_FeePercentage»% of the final Cost of the Work (less that portion of the Cost of the Work pertaining to Contractor’s premiums for insurance and bonds and amounts paid for permits, licenses and inspections), as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Notwithstanding Section 5.a above or any other provisions of the Contract Documents, Contractor guarantees that the Contract Sum will not exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price which will be «Commitment_ProjectedCommitmentValue», as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Rulon Nielsen Director, Construction Management Services | Phone: (208) 496-2650 | Fax: (208) 496-2490 | nielsenru@byui.edu AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds) Contractor will not be entitled under any condition to receive from Owner any amount in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. 6. Independent Contractor Relationship. Contractor is an independent contractor and is not the agent or employee of Owner. 7. Assignment. Contractor will not assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld in Owner’s absolute discretion. Contractor will not assign moneys due or to become due to Contractor hereunder, nor will Contractor pledge the credit of Owner or bind Owner to any third party. 8. Ownership and Confidentiality. Owner will retain ownership and intellectual property rights in all materials provided by Owner to Contractor and to all work products of Contractor for services performed under this Agreement, such products and services of Contractor constituting works made for hire. Contractor will not reuse any portion of the materials provided by Owner or work products developed by Contractor for Owner pursuant to this Agreement or disclose any such materials to any third party without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may withhold its consent in its absolute discretion. 9. Notice. The parties hereby designate the following mailing addresses and email addresses to be used for sending Written Notice to the other party: To Owner Attention: «ProcessFields_OwnersRepresentative», Project Manager Brigham Young University – Idaho Office 283 University Operations Building Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 Email: «ProcessFields_OwnersRepresentativeEmailA» To Contractor Attention: «ProcessFields_VendorsRepresentative», «ProcessFields_TitleOfVendorsRepresentati» «Company_Name» «Company_Address», «Company_Suite», «Company_City», «Company_State», «Company_Zip» Email: «ProcessFields_VendorsRepresentativeEmail» Rulon Nielsen Director, Construction Management Services | Phone: (208) 496-2650 | Fax: (208) 496-2490 | nielsenru@byui.edu AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (Cost Plus a Fee With GMP/Bonds) 10. Effective Date. The effective date of the Agreement is «ProcessFields_vDay» day of «ProcessFields_vMonth», «ProcessFields_vYear». OWNER: Brigham Young University-Idaho, a non-profit Idaho corporation «ProcessFields_Pres_SignatureNotNeeded» President – BYU-Idaho Date «ProcessFields_SignatureNotNeeded» University Resources Vice President Date University Operations Managing Director Date CONTRACTOR: «Company_Name» Authorized Representative Date Print Name: «ProcessFields_NameofVendorSigningAuthori» Title: «ProcessFields_TitleofVendorSigningAuthor» Contractor License No: «ProcessFields_VendorsLicenseNumber» Fed I.D.: «ProcessFields_VendorsFederalIDNumber» Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 1 General Conditions GENERAL CONDITIONS for a FIXED SUM (U.S.) T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 2 OWNER SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT SECTION 5 SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS SECTION 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK SECTION 8 TIME SECTION 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION SECTION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY SECTION 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS SECTION 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK SECTION 13 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES SECTION 14 TERMINATION SECTION 15 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A.Agreement: the document entitled "Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Fixed Sum (U.S.), executed by Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work. B.Architect: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. C.Change In The Work: a modification to the requirements of the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect to Contractor or from another event or circumstance. D.Change Order: a written instrument prepared by Architect and signed by Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum as a result of the Change in the Work; and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time as a result of the Change in the Work. E.Construction Change Directive: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Owner which: (1) orders a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work described in Section 7.1 or after occurrence of an event or circumstance described in Section 7.2; and (2) states a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the Work. F.Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. G.Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work. H.Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement for the Substantial Completion of the Work. I.Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. J.Day: calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. K.Direct Costs: actual costs for labor, materials, equipment, insurance, bonds, subcontract costs and onsite supervision relating to the Project. They do not include labor costs for project managers or other off-site administration. L.Drawings: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. M.Field Change: a written order prepared by Architect and signed by Architect and Contractor for a minor Change in the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract Documents costing $1,000 or less, resulting in no time extension, and which is necessary to avoid delaying the Work. N.Modification: a written amendment to the Contract Documents in the form of a: 1.Change Order; 2.Construction Change Directive; or 3.Field Change. O.Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. P.Project: the total construction designed by Architect of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. Q.Product Data: standard illustrations, schedules, perfor- mance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of such materials or equipment. R.Project Manual: the document identified as such in the Agreement. S.Samples And Mock-ups: physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish stan- dards by which the Work will be judged. T.Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, sched- ules, performance charts, fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other data which illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. U.Specifications: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. V.Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials, equipment, construction or services for the Work under separate contract with Contractor or any other Subcontractor. Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 2 General Conditions W.Submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Architect to demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be used in the Work. X.Substantial Completion: Completion of the Work to a point where the local building official issues a Certificate of Occupancy. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified as such by Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents. Y.Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services required by the Contract Documents. Z.Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the other at the addresses or facsimile numbers listed in the Agreement, or at such other addresses or facsimile numbers as the parties will designate from time to time by Written Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of: 1.The date of personal delivery to the other party with signed acknowledgment of receipt; or 2.The date sent by facsimile transmission to the other party provided receipt of the facsimile is verified by an electronic confirmation report by the party sending the facsimile transmission and further provided that a confirmation copy is sent to the other party by courier or by registered or certified mail within twenty-four (24) hours after the time and date of the facsimile transmission; or 3.The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by courier. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. B.The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontrac- tors or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. C.Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance with such recognized meanings. D.In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Drawings, the Project Manual, and copies thereof are the property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents on any other project. Contractor may retain one copy of the Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and will return or destroy all remaining copies following final completion of the Work. SECTION 2 - OWNER 2.1 OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner’s approval or authorization. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER A.Owner will be responsible for establishment of property lines and benchmarks for grading. B.Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. C.Owner will furnish to Contractor a reasonable number of copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the Addenda. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect any portion of the Work wherever located at any time. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for that order has been eliminated. SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A.By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it has visited the Project site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its own observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B.Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract Documents and any other available information relating to the Project prior to commencing and during performance of each portion of the Work and will immediately report to Architect any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it discovers. C.Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing that portion of the Work about which there is a question, Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from Architect before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a request and receiving an interpretation or clarification from Architect. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors become aware of the question until after work on the relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the following precedence will govern for purposes of determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a Change in the Work: 1.The Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 2.The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions. 3.The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the Specifications. 4.An Addendum or a Modification take precedence over the document(s) modified by the Addendum or Modification. Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 3 General Conditions 5.The Specifications take precedence over the Drawings. 6.Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take prece- dence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. D.Contractor will give Architect notice of any additional drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as not to delay the Work. E.It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or Architect effects Modifications to the Contract Documents required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising therefrom. F.Contractor will take field measurements and verify field conditions and will compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before ordering any materials or commencing construction activities. Contractor will immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that it discovers to Architect. If Contractor orders materials or commences construction activities before taking field measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions different from those anticipated by Contractor which would have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or commencing construction activities. G. If site conditions indicated in the Contract Documents or other information provided by Owner or Architect to Contractor differ materially from those Contractor encounters in perfor- mance of the Work, Contractor will immediately notify Architect in writing of such differing site conditions. 3.2 SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A.Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the use of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely notice to Owner and Architect in writing that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in writing to proceed at Owner’s risk. B. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to provide efficient business administration and supervision, to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner. C.Contractor will be responsible for: 1.The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements as shown in the Contract Documents; 2.The location and layout of the Work as shown in the Contract Documents with respect to the position of the Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in relation to grade; and 3.Setting and maintaining construction stakes. D.Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. E.Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner, Architect or their consultants. F.Contractor will be responsible for inspection of portions of the Work already completed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of the Work. 3.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS A.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. B.Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among those performing the Work and will not permit employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned to them. C.Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work connected therewith until Owner has accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for such work or materials from the Owner. D.Contractor will remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcon- tractor, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. E.Contractor will be responsible for determining that all materials furnished for the Work meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect may require Contractor to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Architect, would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used, or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished at Contractor’s expense. This provision will not require Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of the same material, unless such testing is specifically required by the Contract Documents to be performed at Contractor’s expense. F.Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials. G.Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equip- ment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will be free from defects, and will conform with the require- Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 4 General Conditions ments of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective in the discretion of Owner. If required by Architect, Contractor will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment used in performing the Work. H.Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to such materials. 3.4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating to performance of the Work. 3.5 TAXES A.Contractor will pay all sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of the Work. B.Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the Project site. 3.6 PERMITS AND FEES A.Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work. B.Contractor will obtain and pay for the building permit, and all other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. C.Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Architect prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion by Architect. 3.7 CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable to Owner to supervise the performance of the Work. This representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to Final Inspection of the Work without prior written consent of Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all purposes, including communication with Owner. 3.8 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A.Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Architect's information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B.Contractor will prepare and maintain a Submittal schedule which is coordinated with Contractor's construction schedule and sets forth specified times for Architect to review Submittals. 3.9 DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE SITE Contractor will keep at the Project site for use by Owner, Architect, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, and all Modifica- tions. These documents will be maintained in good order and currently marked to record changes and selections made during construction. In addition, Contractor will keep at the Project site one copy of all Submittals. 3.10 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporat- ed into the Contract Documents by a Modification. B.Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Architect Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents or will make such determination, verification, check, and coordination prior to commencing the relevant portion of the Work. In reviewing Submittals Architect will be entitled to rely upon Contractor’s representation that such information is correct and accurate. C.Contractor will inform Architect in writing at the time of submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will provide Architect with documentation demonstrating to Architect that the Submittal is equal to or better than the specified product or work. Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect’s acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed Architect in writing of the deviation and Architect has incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a Modification. D.Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been reviewed and accepted in writing by Architect. E.When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such certifications, and neither Owner nor Architect will be expected to make any independent examination with respect thereto. F.Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned to Contractor without action. 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to complete the Work and make its parts fit together properly. 3.12 ACCESS TO WORK Contractor will permit Owner, Architect their representatives and consultants access to the Work wherever located at any time. 3.13 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on account thereof. 3.14 INDEMNIFICATION Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 5 General Conditions A.Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Owner's representatives, employees, agents, architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively “Claims” or “Claim”), including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property, including loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all losses or injury to Owner’s property, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent it was the cause thereof. In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified hereunder may tender the defense of such Claim to Contractor. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party. B.In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at Contractor's sole expense. C.In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by Contractor. D.The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 3.15 PROJECT MEETINGS Contractor will attend and participate in meetings as required by the Contract Documents. SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship with Architect, Owner will appoint in writing another architect, whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Architect in all respects. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A.Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Although Architect is required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the basis of its observations while at the site, Architect will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Architect’s failure to observe a defect or deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments. B.Architect will review Contractor's payment requests and determine the amounts due Contractor in accordance with Section 9. C.Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Contractor with Architect’s consultants relating to the Work will be through Architect. Communications between Owner or Architect and subcontractors relating to the Work will be through Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any separate contractor will be through Architect, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. D.Architect will have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at Contractor's expense: 1.Any portion of the Work that does not meet the require- ments of the Contract Documents. 2.Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuit- able during installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection. E.Architect will have authority to stop the Work, with concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be necessary in its reasonable opinion to insure the proper performance of the Work. F.Architect will review Contractor’s Submittals and will accept or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals. Architect's review of the Submittals will be for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substan- tiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. Architect's review of Submittals will not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. Architect's review of Submittals will not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Architect's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a compo- nent. G.Architect has authority to order Construction Change Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 7. H.Architect will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive and review written guarantees and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and will review and certify or reject Contractor's final payment request. I.Architect will be the interpreter of the performance and requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect's interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings. Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 6 General Conditions J.Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the Contract Documents. SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors to perform all portions of the Work that Contractor does not customarily perform with its own employees. B.Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. C.If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute to whom Owner has no reasonable objection. D.Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcon- tractor that has been accepted by Owner and Architect without the prior written approval of Owner and Architect. 5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS A.Contractor's responsibility for the Work includes the labor and materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommend- ed or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any warranties required for such work will be obtained by Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Architect. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or any effects therefrom. B.Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which Owner made payment. C.Contractor will require each Subcontractor to: 1.Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located where such licensing is required by the governing authority; 2.Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work; 3.Assume toward Contractor the same obligations Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the prompt payment of its Subcontractors; 4.Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner; 5.Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for payments made by Contractor; and 6.Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in the same manner as Contractor is required to make such claims to Owner. SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK OR AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A.Owner reserves the right to perform work itself or to award separate contracts in connection with the Project. B.When separate contracts are awarded, "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case will mean the contractor who signs each separate contract. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY A.Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to place and store their materials and equip- ment on site and to perform their work and will properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable. B.If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any separate contractor for proper performance or results, Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper performance and results. Failure of Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. C.Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or partially completed work of other contractors or to the property of Owner or other contractors. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contrac- tors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts for maintaining the Project free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean the Project, allocate the cost among those responsible as Owner and Architect determine to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or to become due to Contractor. SECTION 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR A.If Owner or Architect gives Contractor an instruction that modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If compliance with the instruction affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in cost subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction delays Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, Paragraphs B through G and Section 7.3, Paragraph A and Contractor will be paid liquidated damages for the delay as set forth in Section 7.3, Paragraph B. B.If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Architect that Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work, Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify Architect in writing that Contractor considers such instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Architect agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Modification in accordance with Section 7.1, Paragraphs C. and D. within ten (10) days. C.If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown itemized as required by Owner. The breakdown will be in sufficient detail to Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 7 General Conditions allow Owner to determine any increase or decrease in Direct Costs as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any amount claimed for subcontracts will be supported by a similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractor’s profit and overhead charges. Profit and overhead will be subject to the following limitations: 1.The Subcontractor’s profit and overhead will not exceed twelve (12) percent of its Direct Costs. 2.Contractor’s profit and overhead on Subcontractor’s work will not exceed five (5) percent. 3.Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by its own crews will not exceed ten (10) percent of its Direct Costs. 4.Contractor's profit and overhead mark up on work per- formed by its Subcontractors will not exceed five (5) percent of the Subcontractors’ charges for such work. 5.Amounts due Owner as a result of a credit change will be the actual net savings to Contractor from the Change in the Work as confirmed by Architect. On credit changes, profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will not be credited back to Owner. If both additions and credits are involved in a single Change in the Work, overhead and profit will be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, related to that Change in the Work. D.If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or Architect, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction will delay Substantial Completion. E.Upon receipt of Contractor’s proposal for Modification, Architect and Owner will determine whether to proceed with the Change in the Work. If Architect and Owner determine to proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change as appropriate. F.Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from Owner or Architect without first giving written notice to Architect as provided in Section 7.1., Paragraph B, and receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. G.If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and Architect do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work, Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may submit its claim for adjustment to the Contract Sum, the Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days after compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. 7.2 CHANGE IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR CIRCUMSTANCE A.If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from Owner or Architect affects the cost to Contractor of performing the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, the Contract Sum will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost to perform the Work resulting from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in such section. If the circumstance or event delays Substantial Completion and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, then Contractor will be compensated for costs incident to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3, Paragraph B. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Contract Sum or other damages from Owner as a result of any event or circumstance unless the event or circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B.If a Change in the Work results from any event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will give Owner Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twenty- four (24) hours after commencement of the event or circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Contract Sum based on any damages or delays resulting from such event or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24) hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to Owner. C.Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum resulting from an event or circumstance within the time limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum or to any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or event and waives any claim therefor. 1.Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to inclement weather will be made by the tenth (10th) of the month following the month in which the delay oc- curred. 2.Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum due to any other circumstance or event will be submitted within seven (7) days after the occurrence of the circumstance or event. D.If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) because of an event or circumstance resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown as described in Section 7.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for increased labor costs as a result of the event or circumstance must be supported by a certified payroll. Any claim for rented equipment or additional material costs must be supported by invoices. E.If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance, Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules, and other supporting information necessary to justify Contractor’s claim that the event or circumstance delayed Substantial Completion. If Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance caused by the wilful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect, Contractor will be compen- sated for all costs related to the delay in accordance with Section 7.3, Paragraph B. F.Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Contractor's claim, Architect will either deny the claim or recommend approval to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 8 General Conditions the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5 or a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. If Owner or Architect denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within the thirty (30) day time period, then Contractor agrees it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time and/ or Contract Sum or any other damages as a result of the event or circumstance and waives any claim therefor. 7.3 EXTENSIONS OF TIME A.If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such delay: 1.Labor strikes or lock-outs; 2.Inclement weather; 3.Unusual delay in transportation; 4.Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements; 5.A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by Owner or Architect to Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in Section 7.1.; or 6.Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Architect. B.Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4. For each day of delay in Substantial Completion described in Section 7.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 5 and 6, Contractor will be paid liquidated damages in the amount per day set forth in the Supplementary Conditions to compensate Contractor for all damages resulting from any delay including but not limited to damages for general conditions costs, additional job site costs, additional home office overhead costs, disruption costs, acceleration costs, increase in labor costs, increase in subcontract costs, in- crease in materials costs, and any other costs incident to the delay. Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation relating to the delay. 7.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change. If Owner, Architect and Contractor reach agreement regarding the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. If Owner, Architect and Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment in Contract Sum or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Architect will issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 7.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Architect and Contractor only. 7.5 CHANGE ORDERS Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or any other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order, irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the Work is described as a change in the requirements of the Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of perfor- mance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact of other Changes in the Work. 7.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A.Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change Directives. B.Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction Change Directive may be included in Contractor's payment requests once the work relating thereto is completed. C.If after the work described in the Construction Change Directive is completed, Owner, Architect, and Contractor reach agreement on adjustments in the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both, such agreement will be reflected in an appropriate Change Order. D.If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjust- ment to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both relating to the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) days of the completion of the work described therein, then Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of the completion of such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 13 within thirty (30) days of completion of the work described in the Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such work except as set forth in the Construction Change Directive and waives any claim therefor. 7.7 FIELD CHANGES Architect and Contractor will sign a Field Change order listing the Change In The Work and the Contract Sum including markups before Contractor proceeds with the Field Change. 7.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS Except as set forth in Section 7, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever resulting from an instruction from Owner or Architect, any event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or Architect and Contractor expressly waives any and all claims therefor. SECTION 8 - TIME 8.1 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE A.All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for perform- ing the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with adequate resources and will achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.2 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK Contractor will not commence work on the Project site until the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed. However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agree- ment with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) days after Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insurance pursuant to Section 11 unless Owner earlier terminates the Agreement pursuant to Section 14. 8.3 DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 9 General Conditions A. For each day after the expiration of the Contract Time that Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the Supple- mentary Conditions as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added administrative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable expenses from any money due or to become due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request from Owner for payment. B.At the time Architect certifies that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion, Architect will identify the remaining items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of those items. Architect will set forth the items to be completed and the time established for their completion in a Certificate of Substantial Completion. For each day that Contractor exceeds the time allowed for completion of the items set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional administrative expenses the amount set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in completing such items. SECTION 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor will submit to Architect a schedule of values which allocates the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work. The schedule of values will be supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as required by Architect. This schedule, when accepted by Owner and Architect, will be used as a basis for reviewing Contractor's payment requests. 9.2 PAYMENT REQUESTS A.Not more than once a month, Contractor will submit a payment request to Architect for Work completed, materials stored on the site, and for materials stored offsite as of the date of the payment request. The amount of the payment request will be based upon the schedule of values and will be equal to the value of the Work completed: 1. Less retention amounts specified in Supplementary Conditions; 2. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as part of the Contract Sum; and 3. Less offsets allowed under Section 9.4. The payment request may include Changes in the Work that have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner and/or Architect pursuant to Section 7. If a payment request includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with the payment request a list of the materials, the location where they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its performance bond surety that payment be made for such materials. B.Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of payment for materials and equipment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security inter- ests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such materials and equipment until actual delivery to the project site, incorporation into the Work, and final acceptance by Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equipment covered by a payment request is subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encum- brance thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or entity. 9.3 PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION A.Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the pay- ment request certified for such amount as Architect determines is properly due. If Architect certifies less than the full amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner of Architect's reasons for withholding certification of the full amount requested. B.The certification of the payment request will constitute a representation by Architect to Owner based upon Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by Architect. However, the certification of the payment request will not constitute a representation that Architect has: 1.Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspec- tions to check the quantity or quality of the Work; 2.Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; 3.Reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcon- tractors or other data requested by Owner to substanti- ate Contractor's right to payment; or 4.Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. C. In taking action on Contractor’s payment request, Owner will be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by Contractor. 9.4 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND PAYMENT A.Architect may withhold certification of a payment request in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner if, in the opinion of Architect, the representations to Owner required by Section 9.3, Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment request, Architect will notify Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, Architect will promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which Architect is able to make such representations to Owner. Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment request previously certified, to such extent as may be necessary in Architect's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: 1.Defective work not remedied; 2.Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- ing probable filing of such claims; 3.Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment, construction or services; 4.Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 10 General Conditions 5.Damage to Owner or another contractor for which Contractor is responsible; 6.Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be complet- ed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of completing the Work and damages for the anticipated delay; or 7.Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B.Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor, subsequent to Architect's certification of any payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to any condition described in Section 9.4, Paragraph A, Subparagraphs 1 through 7. Upon satisfactory resolution of any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made. 9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A.Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after: 1.Contractor has submitted a progress payment request; 2.Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment documents (in content complying with Idaho Code executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s progress payment request; and 3.Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion and submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to the Architect Owner’s form entitled “Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety” fully executed by Contractor and its surety, if any, and provides statutory Conditional Waiver and Release documents executed by all subcontractors and suppliers having claim against the retained funds, Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within forty-five (45) days from the later of (a) the date Owner received Contractor’s payment request for retained funds and fully executed Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety, (b) the date a certificate of occupancy is issued; (c) the date that a building inspector having authority to issue its own certificate of occupancy does not issue that certificate but permits occupancy. . C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion. D.Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. E.Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. F.No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. G.In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 5% of payments made to Contractor. 9.6 FINAL PAYMENT A.Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within twenty-one (21) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1.Contractor has submitted its final payment request; 2.Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete; and 3. Architect has received conditional releases or releases or waivers of lien from all Subcontractors. B.Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcon- tractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner. SECTION 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and supervising all safety programs in connection with the performance of the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A.Contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1.All persons on the site; 2.The Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- rated into the Work; and 3.Other property at the site or adjacent to it. B.Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful requirements of public authorities bearing on the safety or protection of persons and property. C.Contractor will designate a responsible member of its organization at the site whose duty will be the prevention of accidents. This person will be Contractor's onsite representative unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner and Architect. 10.3 EMERGENCIES In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from Architect or Owner, act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property. Contractor will immediately notify Architect of such emergency action and make a full written report to Architect within five (5) days after the event. SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE A.Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide evidence thereof as described below prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier: 1.Workers Compensation Insurance. 2. Employers Liability Insurance with minimum limits of the greater of $500,000 per accident/disease or as required by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 3.Commercial General Liability Insurance - ISO Form CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent Occurrence Policy which will provide primary coverage in the event of any Occurrence Claim, or Suit, with: a.Limits of not less than: 1)$2,000, 000 General Aggregate; 2)$2,000, 000 Products - Comp/OPS Aggre- gate: 3)$1,000, 000 Personal and Advertising Injury: Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 11 General Conditions 4)$1,000, 000 Each Occurrence; 5)$50,000 Fire Damage (any one fire); and 6)$5,000 Medical Expense (any one person). b.Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent: 1)ISO Form CG 25 03 (10/93), Amendment Of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the Agreement and specifying limits as shown above. 2)ISO Form CG 20 10 (10/93), Additional Insured -- Owners, Lessees, Or Contractors (Form B), naming Owner and Architect as additional insureds. 4.Automobile Liability Insurance, with: a.A minimum limit of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit per accident; and b. Coverage applying to "Any Auto." B.Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner as follows: 1.Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25-S (3/93) Form, or equivalent: a.Listing Owner as a Certificate Holder and Additional Insured on general liability and any excess liability policies; b.Attaching the endorsements set forth above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non-ISO forms will be attached to this certificate); c.Identifying the Project by specifying individual project name, on said certificate; d.Containing a cancellation clause of the certificate amended to read: “Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will mail 30 days prior written notice to the certificate holder names to the left”; e.Listing the insurance companies providing coverage (All companies listed must be rated "B+ Class VII" or better in the A.M. Best Company Key Rating Guide-Property-Casualty, current edition); and f.Bearing the name, address and telephone number of the producer and an original signature of the authorized representative of the producer. C.Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work, Insurance coverage required in Section 11.1 as follows: 1.Commercial General Liability Insurance through expiration of warranty period specified in Section 12.2, Paragraph B. including completion of any warranty repairs; and 2. All other insurance through Final Payment. D.Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without cause. E.The cost of insurance as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for payment of all deductible amounts under all insurance. F.Contractor will provide builders risk insurance for the cost of the Project. The policy will be written on an all risk basis with coverage for perils of wind, flood, earthquake, and terrorism, with exclusions standard for the insurance industry. The terms, conditions, and deadlines of the builders risk policy shall govern coverage. In addition, when there is a loss which may be covered by the builders risk insurance policy, Contractor will comply with the following: 1. Contractor will report the loss immediately to the Owner. 2. Contractor will immediately notify its general liability insurance carrier of the loss. 3. Contractor will take all necessary and appropriate actions to protect the property and individuals from further loss, harm, and injury. In the event there are damages resulting from fire or water, restoration shall be performed only by a certified restoration contractor. 4. To the extent possible, Contractor will preserve and not disturb the evidence of the loss until after the builders risk commercial insurer and all interested parties and their insurance carriers have had the opportunity to view and investigate the site and loss. 5. Contractor will cooperate with Owner and the builders risk commercial insurer in the investigation, documentation, and settlement of loss claims, including without limitation promptly responding to all requests for information and documentation from the builders risk commercial insurer and/or Owner. 11.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A.Prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such bonds will: 1.Be written on Form AIA Document A312 (1987). 2.Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 31, of the United States Code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. 3.Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #670 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e. “Treasury List”. 4.Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney stating the authority of the attorney-in-fact executing the bonds on behalf of the surety. B.Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. C.The cost of the bonds as required above will be the obligation of Contractor. SECTION 12 - UNCOVERING AND COR- RECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK Contractor will notify Architect at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of performing work that would cover up work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections required by the Specifications or by applicable governing authorities. Should any such work be covered without proper notification having been given to Architect, Contractor will uncover that work for inspection at its own expense. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK A.Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work that is rejected by Architect or which fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspection costs, compensation for Architect's services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby. Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 12 General Conditions B.Contractor will remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all costs of correcting faulty work, including additional Architect's fees, attorneys’ fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred. C.Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to establish a period of limitation within which Owner may enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents. The one-year period specified above has no relationship to the time within which compliance with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK A.If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring removal and correction of the nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties that reflects the difference in value to Owner between the Work as specified and the nonconforming Work. Such adjustment may consider increased maintenance costs, early replace- ment costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will be effective whether or not final payment has been made. Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 7.5. B.Temporary or trial usage by Owner or Architect of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to written acceptance by Architect, will not constitute Owner's acceptance. SECTION 13 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 13.1 SUBMITTAL OF DISPUTE In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement which cannot be resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may submit the dispute with all documentation upon which it relies to Director of Project Construction, Physical Facilities Department, 50 East North Temple, 11th Floor, Salt Lake City, Utah 84150, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) days. The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first day of the dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the Director as outlined above is a condition precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the Director, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such other party any costs and attorneys fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy costs, and expert and consultant fees and expenses. 13.2 CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. SECTION 14 - TERMINATION 14.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within ten (10) days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Owner and recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum represented by the Work completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE Should Contractor fail to provide Owner with the bonds and certificates of insurance required by Section 11 within the time specified therein, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractor’s schedule, or other- wise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within ten (10) days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor and/or take possession of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional administrative, architectural, consultant, and legal services (including without limitation attorneys fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses), such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such expense exceeds the unpaid balance, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 14.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time. In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner the percentage of the Contract Sum equal to the percentage of the Work which Architect Updated 1/15 – Revision 04 Page 13 General Conditions determines has been completed on the Project site as of the date of termination together with any out of pocket loss Contractor has sustained with respect to materials and equipment as a result of the termination prior to completion of the Work, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials that Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. SECTION 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 15.1 GOVERNING LAW The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have substantial connections to the State of Utah. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed, and delivered in Salt Lake City, Utah. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Utah, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Salt Lake City, Utah and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Salt Lake City, Utah and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. 15.2 NO WAIVER No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect, or Contractor will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 15.3 RULE OF CONSTRUCTION Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or Contractor because of authorship. 15.4 ENFORCEMENT In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorneys fees and costs, including without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all appeals, from the other party. 15.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.Owner and Architect have the right to have tests made when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner or Architect will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent tests related to the failure necessary to determine compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contract Sum by Modification. B.Tests will be made in accordance with recognized stan- dards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract Document requirements will be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of Contractor. C.Owner and Architect have the right to obtain samples of materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for determining whether they meet Contract Document require- ments. Samples required for testing will be furnished by Contractor and selected as directed by Architect. Samples may be required from the sample's source, point of manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at Architect's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract Document requirements, Contractor will provide other Samples that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 1 Supplementary Conditions S U P P L E M E N T A R Y C O N D I T I O N S FIXED SUM (U.S.) ITEM 1 - GENERAL 1.Conditions of the Contract apply to each Division of the Specifications. 2.Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Divisions 02 through 33 of the Specifications. ITEM 2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGE AMOUNTS: 1.The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Contractor for delays under General Conditions Section 7.3, Paragraph B is $100 per day. 2.The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in Substantial Completion of the Work under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph A is $325 per day. 3.The amount of liquidated damages to be deducted by Owner from final payment for delays in completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions Article 8.3, Paragraph B is $100 per day. ITEM 3 - PERMITS 1.Section 3.6, Paragraph B add the following: B.Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of the permits by submitting a copy of the receipt to the Owner. Payment shall be made by check to the Contractor without processing a Change Order. ITEM 4 - MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.1 - COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION & COMPLETION OF THE WORK A.The Contractor shall be required to commence work 01.15.2018 or promptly after receipt of the contract from the Owner. B.The Contractor shall prosecute the work diligently so as to complete it within the time limit allowed in this document. C.The Contractor agrees to complete this work required by the Contract on or before midnight 07.31.2018. D.Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the Contract. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER D.Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the owners Project Management Software. Including, but not limited to; RFI’s, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as directed by owner. THE FOLLOWING ADDS TO SECTION 3.7 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 3.7 – CONTRACTOR’S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE B.The Superintendent shall be present full-time at the Project site during the progress of the work. Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 2 Supplementary Conditions THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 7.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR ARCHITECT TO CONTRACTOR A.The contract language contained in the Supplementary General Conditions take precedence over all other change order pricing contract provisions in the contract documents. It is understood that these contract provisions will govern the pricing and administration of all change order proposals to be submitted by the General Contractor and/or the Trade Contractors and/or the Subcontractors and/or all other lower tier sub-subcontractors (all referred to as “Contractor”). In the event of a conflict between the other contract documents used for the project, these change order pricing contract provisions shall govern. B. Contractor agrees that it will incorporate the provisions into all agreements with lower tier Contractors. It is understood that these change order pricing provisions apply to all types of contracts and/or subcontracts specifically including lump sum (or fixed price contracts), unit price contracts, and/or cost plus contracts. It is further understood that these change order provisions will apply to all methods of change order pricing specifically including lump sum change order proposals, unit price change order proposals, and cost plus change order proposals. C. Whenever change order proposals to adjust the contract price become necessary, the Owner will have the right to select the method of pricing to be used by the contractor in accordance with the pricing provisions. The options will be (1) lump sum change order proposal, (2) unit price change order proposal, or (3) cost plus change order proposal as defined in the following provisions. 1.Lump Sum Change Order Proposals: The Owner will require itemized change orders on all change order proposals from the Contractor, subcontractors, and sub- subcontractors regardless of tier. Details to be submitted will include detailed line item estimates showing detailed materials quantity take-offs, material prices by item and related labor hour pricing information and extensions (by line item or by drawing as applicable.) 2.Labor: Estimated labor hours shall include hours only for those workmen and working foremen directly involved in performing the change order work. Supervision above the level of working foremen (such as general foremen, superintendent, project manager, etc.) is considered to be included in the Markup Percentages as outlined in paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7. 3.Labor Burden: Labor burden allowable in change orders shall be defined as employer's net actual cost of payroll taxes (FICA, Medicare, SUTA, FUTA), net actual cost for employer's cost of union benefits (or other usual and customary fringe benefits if the employees are not union employees), and net actual cost to employer for worker's compensation insurance taking into consideration adjustments for experience modifiers, premium discounts, dividends, rebates, expense constants, assigned risk pool costs, net cost reductions due to policies with deductibles for self-insured losses, assigned risk rebates, etc. Contractor shall reduce their standard payroll tax percentages to properly reflect the effective cost reduction due to the estimated impact of the annual maximum wages subject to payroll taxes. 4.Material: Estimated material change order costs shall reflect the Contractor's reasonably anticipated net actual cost for the purchase of the material needed for the change order work. Estimated material costs shall reflect cost reductions available to the Contractor due to “non-Cash” discounts, trade discounts, free material credits, and/or volume rebates. Price quotations from material suppliers must be itemized with unit prices for each specific item to be purchased. "Lot pricing" quotations will not be considered sufficient substantiating detail. Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 3 Supplementary Conditions 5.Equipment: Allowable change order estimated costs may include appropriate amounts for rental of major equipment specifically needed to perform the change order work (defined as tools and equipment with an individual purchase cost of more than $750). For contractor owned equipment, the "bare" equipment rental rates allowed to be used for pricing change order proposals shall be 75% of the monthly rate listed in the most current publication of The AED Green Book divided by 176 to arrive at a maximum hourly rate to be applied to the hours the equipment is used performing the change order work. Further, for contractor owned equipment the aggregate equipment rent charges for any single piece of equipment used in all change order work shall be limited to 50% of the fair market value of the piece of equipment when the first change order is priced involving usage of the piece of equipment. Fuel necessary to operate the equipment will be considered as a separate direct cost associated with the change order work. 6.Maximum Markup Percentage Allowable on Self-Performed Work: With respect to pricing change orders, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee to be paid to any Contractor (regardless of tier) on self-performed work shall be a single markup percentage not-to-exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the net direct cost of (1) direct labor and allowable labor burden costs applicable to the change order or extra work; (2) the net cost of material and installed equipment incorporated into the change or extra work, and (3) net rental cost of major equipment and related fuel costs necessary to complete the change in the Work. The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing, supervising and performing, the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit. 7.Maximum Markup Percentages Allowable on Work Performed by Lower Tier Contractors: With respect to pricing the portion of change order proposals involving work performed by lower tier contractors, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee allowable to the Contractor supervising the lower tier contractor's work shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the net of all approved change order work performed by all subcontractors combined for any particular change order proposal. The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing, supervising and performing the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead costs and profit. 8.No Markup on Bonds and Liability Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage Fee. 9.Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage Fee is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage Fee include, but are not limited to: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; shop drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools is also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage Fee. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750. 10.Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentages referenced in the preceding paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the sliding scale percentages as outlined in Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 4 Supplementary Conditions paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount. 11.Contingency: In no event will any lump sum or percentage amounts for "contingency" be allowed to be added as a separate line item in change order estimates. Unknowns attributable to labor hours will be accounted for when estimating labor hours anticipated to perform the work. Unknowns attributable to material scrap and waste will be estimated as part of material costs. 12.Change Order Proposal Time and Change Directives: The Contractor's proposals for changes in the contract amount or time shall be submitted within seven (7) calendar days of the Owner's request, unless the Owner extends such period of time due to the circumstances involved. If such proposals are not received in a timely manner, if the proposals are not acceptable to Owner, or if the changed work should be started immediately to avoid damage to the project or costly delay, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changes without waiting for the Contractor's proposal or for the formal change order to be issued. In the case of an unacceptable Contractor proposal, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the changed work on a cost-plus basis with an agreed upon "not-to-exceed" price for the work to be performed. Such directions to the Contractor by the Owner shall be confirmed in writing by a "Notice to Proceed on Changes" letter within seven (7) calendar days. The cost or credit, and or time extensions will be determined by negotiations as soon as practical thereafter and incorporated in a Change Order to the Contract. THE FOLLOWING ADDS SECTION 7.9 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 7.9 Owner’s Right to Audit A.Liability Insurance and Bonds: In the event the Contractor has been required to furnish comprehensive general liability insurance and/or performance and/or payment bonds as part of the base contract price, a final contract change order will be processed to account for the Contractor's net increase or decrease in comprehensive general liability insurance costs and/or bond premium costs associated with change orders to Contractor's base contract price. B.Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor (subcontractor or sub-sub contractor) agrees that it is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to support its Lump Sum Change and/or Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other contract price adjustments under the contract. Contractor further agrees to submit change order proposals with cost and pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of the contract with respect to pricing of change orders. C.Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor, subcontractor and sub-sub- contractor agrees that any designated Owner's representative will have the right to examine (copy or scan) the records of the Contractor, subcontractor or sub-sub contractor’s records (during the contract period and up to three years after final payment is made on the contract) to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all change order proposals and/or claims. Contractor agrees that if the Owner determines the cost and pricing data submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in compliance with the terms of the contract regarding pricing of change orders, an appropriate contract price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval contract price adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and/or subcontractors and to all types of change order proposals specifically including lump sum change orders, unit price change orders, and cost-plus change orders. Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 5 Supplementary Conditions D.Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor, subcontractor agrees to provide and require all Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost information as outlined in this Exhibit "A". This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the Contractor's actual labor and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit. Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate. THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 9.5 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A.Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Section 9.2 within fifteen (15) days after: 1.Contractor has submitted a progress payment request; 2.Contractor has submitted Conditional Waiver and Release Upon Progress Payment documents executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s progress payment request; and 3.Owner receives the certified payment request from Architect. B. After Contractor achieves Substantial Completion and submits its payment request for retained funds and delivers to the Architect Owner’s form entitled “Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety” fully executed by Contractor and its surety, if any, and provides statutory Conditional Waiver and Release documents executed by all subcontractors and suppliers having claim against the retained funds, Owner will pay any unpaid retention less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 9.4 within forty-five (45) days from the later of (a) the date Owner received Contractor’s payment request for retained funds and fully executed Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety, (b) the date a certificate of occupancy is issued; (c) the date that a building inspector having authority to issue its own certificate of occupancy does not issue that certificate but permits occupancy. C. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the United States mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion. D.Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. E.Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project site for review by the Subcontractors. F.No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. G.In addition and notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner will also withhold and retain 5% of payments made to Contractor. These retention funds will be held in an interest bearing account. THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 9.6 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 9.6 FINAL PAYMENT A.Owner will make full and final payment of the Contract Sum within thirty (30) days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1.Contractor has submitted its final payment request; Updated 1/15 – Revision 03 Page 6 Supplementary Conditions 2.Contractor has submitted Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment documents executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s final payment request; and 3.Architect has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete. B.Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 7 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. C. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner. THE FOLLOWING ADDS TO SECTION 11.2 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 11.2.A PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 5.BYU-Idaho does not require Labor, Material Payment and/or Performance Bonds on Bid Proposals under $40,000. THE FOLLOWING REPLACES SECTION 15.1 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS: 15.1 GOVERNING LAW A. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Idaho, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in Pocatello, Idaho and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Pocatello, Idaho and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. END OF DOCUMENT 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCOPE OF THE PROJECT 011100-1 SECTION 011100 - SCOPE OF THE PROJECT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONTRACT: A. All work in this project is to be included in one General Contract. B. This project has work at three different locations: The Taylor Building, the Kimball Building and the Central Energy Facility. C. The work at the different buildings may or may not occur at the same time. Schedule will be based on time of season, backup equipment, building cooling load etc. D. Do not begin work without written authorization from owner’s representatives. E. The general scope of this project includes the following major areas of work. 1. Taylor Building a. Base Bid replaces the existing air cooled water chiller with a new air cooled water chiller. Replace the two existing chilled water pumps with two new chilled water pumps. Replace the existing VFD and starter with two new VFD’s. Modify piping, power, controls, equipment pads, etc. b. Add Alternate No. 1: Taylor Building; Work with Calmac to rebuild each of the 8 existing ice storage units. Replace the branch pipes, shut off valves, balance valves, flex connections, etc. between each existing ice storage unit and the chilled water supply and return mains. c. Add Alternate No. 2: Taylor Building; Replace each of the existing 8 ice storage units with 8 new ice storage units. Replace the branch pipes, shut off valves, balance valves, flex connections, etc. between each new ice storage unit and the chilled water supply and return mains. 2. Kimball Building: a. Replace the existing Kimball Building Data Center air cooled chiller with a new air cooled chiller and separate dry cooler. b. Modify piping, power, controls, equipment pads, fencing, etc. 3. Central Energy Facility: a. Replace the existing rooftop air cooled water chiller with a new rooftop air cooled water chiller. b. Modify piping, power, controls, equipment curbs, etc. 1.2 WORK SCHEDULE: A Work on this project is at three different buildings. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCOPE OF THE PROJECT 011100-2 1. Taylor building work must be done when outside air can be used to cool the building. 2. Kimball Building Data Center work must be done after the existing computer room air conditioning units (CRAC units) have been started and are running satisfactorily. 3. Central Energy Facility work must be done when the existing air cooled water chiller is not needed for campus cooling. B. Liquidated damages will be assessed as noted in the Boiler Plate. 1.3 GENERAL NOTES: A. The locations of existing equipment, pipes, etc. on these drawings are shown in an approximate way only. Field very exact location. B. See drawings for additional requirements of this work. C. Minimize disruption to landscaping, site lights, and sprinkler lines. D. Contractor is responsible for demolition and off-site disposal of all materials which are not usable. E. General Demolition refer to projects specifications and drawings for required work. F. Occupied buildings will remain occupied. Do not disrupt heating, cooling, ventilation, traffic flow, pedestrian flow without consent from the owner’s representative. END OF SECTION 011100 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ALTERNATES 012300-1 SECTION 012300 – ALTERNATES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ALTERNATES 012300-2 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1: Taylor Building; Work with Calmac to rebuild each of the 8 existing ice storage units. Replace the branch pipes, shut off valves, balance valves, flex connections, etc. between each existing ice storage unit and the chilled water supply and return mains. B. Add Alternate No. 2: Taylor Building; Replace each of the existing 8 ice storage units with 8 new ice storage units. Replace the branch pipes, shut off valves, balance valves, flex connections, etc. between each new ice storage unit and the chilled water supply and return mains. END OF SECTION 012300 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT MEETINGS 013119-1 SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to: 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Coordination Meetings. 3. Progress Meetings. 4. Other Meetings B. Construction schedules are specified in a separate Division-1 Section. 1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: A. Schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with the Owner, to be held at the Project site or other convenient location no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: The Owner, Engineer and consultants, the construction company and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work. C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 8. Preparation of Record Documents. 9. Use of premises. Toilet facilities. 10. Office, Work and storage areas. Parking restrictions. 11. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 12. Safety procedures. 13. First aid. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT MEETINGS 013119-2 14. Security. 15. Housekeeping. 16. Working hours. 17. Neighbor Relations. 18. No smoking, no alcohol, no drugs, no foul language. 1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS: A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation meetings. B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. Track open items week to week. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS: A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project site at regularly scheduled intervals. Notify the Owner and Engineer of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. Given the tight time frame for the work, weekly meetings are anticipated. B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Engineer, each subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as: a. Interface requirements. b. Time/schedule. c. Sequencing of work. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication problems. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT MEETINGS 013119-3 f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Housekeeping. l. Quality and Work standards. m. Change Orders. n. Documentation of information for payment requests. D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 OTHER MEETINGS: Call and conduct other project related meetings as may be required to expedite or complete the work, or to initiate improved safety practices, or other items that may impact the project. PART II - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART III - EXECUTION (Not applicable) END OF SECTION 013119 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 013200 - 1 SECTION 013200 - SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS PART I - GENERAL: 1.1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS: A. General: Prepare a fully developed, comprehensive “critical path” construction schedule which identifies the relationships of sequencing of all significant elements of the work as listed in the required “Schedule of Values.” Relate this schedule to the Owner’s master schedule attached to this specification section. Below is a suggested sequence of work to follow: 1. Preliminary Work: Equipment and material procurement and site preparation phase: Submittal preparation and approval shall occur during this phase for all temporary and permanent equipment. 2. All work occurs in three locations. The Taylor Building, Kimball Building (Kimball Building Data Center) and Central Energy Facility. 3. The work in the three different locations may or may not be done at the same time. 4. Provide surface restoration of concrete work and asphalt pavement if damaged during construction. 5. Restore landscape irrigation, plantings and other finish work to a complete condition. B. Submit a realistic project schedule within the committed time frame of the project to Engineer/Owner within 15 calendar days of the receipt of Notice of Award of Contract. Contractors first payment application must be accompanied by the completed schedule, if not submitted previously. 1. Prepare the schedule with a separate bar type time line for each significant construction activity, and showing the time relationship for completion of each element of the work as it relates to other construction activities which follow. As work progresses, use a contrasting graphic representation to indicate actual completion of individual construction activities. 2. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 013200 - 2 3. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities, including minor elements, which may dictate the sequence of the work. Show each activity in proper sequence with graphic indications of elements necessary for completion of various portions of the work. 4. Coordinate the Contractor’s construction schedule with the Schedule of Values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other time related schedules and factors. 5. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Allow time for completion of Project Closeout procedures identified in another Division 1 Section, including preparation of balancing reports, operation and maintenance manuals, completion of record documentation (as-builts), Order for Engineer to certify Substantial Completion. C. Cost Correlation: Coordinate dollar-volume of the work performed as the basis of identifying actual progress of construction as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. D. Revisions to the Schedule: Revise the internal aspects of the schedule to accommodate delays, changes, etc., noting the critical and fixed nature of the final termination points. E. Climate and Weather Considerations: Prepare schedule to account for normal seasonal weather and climate conditions in planning temperature and moisture sensitive elements of the work. F. Distribution: Following Engineer/Owner’s response to the initial submittal of the schedule, print and distribute copies to the Engineer, Owner, subcontractors, suppliers, and others required to comply with the scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project Meeting Room and Contractor’s Field Office. 1. When revisions are made, re-distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule at least monthly to reflect current states of construction progress. Issue the updated schedule as time payment requests are submitted each month. 1.2 MEETINGS AND REPORTING: A. Contractor Project Meetings: (See Section 013119.) Conduct general progress and coordination meetings at least once each month, attended by a representative of each primary entity engaged for performance of work. Record discussions and decisions, and distribute copies to those attending and others affected including Engineer and Owner’s representative. Schedule meetings to coordinate with preparation of payment requests. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 013200 - 3 B. Construction Meetings: (See Section 013119.) Attend weekly coordination meeting to be conducted by Owner’s Project Manager and attended by Engineer, representative and others as determined by progress of work. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A. Prepare a schedule of values to show breakdown of Contract Sum corresponding with payment request breakdown and progress schedule line items. Show dollar value and percent of total for each unit of work scheduled. Submit not less than 7 days prior to first payment request, and revise each time schedule if affected by change order or other value revision (by Contractor). 1.4 PAYMENT REQUESTS: A. Submit request for each calendar month, not later than the 15th day of the following month. B. Use AIA form G702 or equivalent format, fully completed and executed. Submit the forms in triplicate, including attachment of waivers and similar documentation with one copy. C. Prior to the initial payment request, submit: 1. List of principal subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Progress schedule and first progress report. D. Following issuance by Engineer of Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor may submit special payment request, provided the following have been completed: 1. Obtain permits, certificate of occupancy and other approval and releases by governing authorities, required for Owner’s occupancy and use of the project. 2. Submit warranties and similar documentation. 3. Submit maintenance manuals and provide instruction of Owner’s operational/ maintenance personnel. 4. Complete final cleaning of the work. 5. Submit record documents. E. Following completion of the following requirements, final payment request may be submitted: 1. Complete work listed as incomplete at time of substantial completion. 2. Settle liens and any other claims against the project. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 013200 - 4 3. Transfer operational, access, security and similar provisions to Owner; and remove temporary facilities, tools and similar items. 4. Completion of requirements specified in “Project Closeout” section. 5. Obtain consent of surety for final payment. PART II – PRODUCTS - Not Applicable. PART III – EXECUTION - Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 013200 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO QUALITY CONTROL 140000 - 1 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Quality assurance and control of installation. Inspection and testing laboratory services. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Secure an independent laboratory to perform the tests required in the individual Specification Sections. Distribute reports of all tests made by testing laboratories to: 1 copy - Contractor 1 copy - Applicable supplier or subcontractor 1 copy - Owner's representative 1 copy - Engineer Laboratory tests and examinations that the Owner elects to make in its own laboratory will be made at no cost to the Contractor, except that, if a sample of any material or equipment proposed for use by the Contractor fails to meet the Specifications, the cost of testing subsequent samples shall be borne by the Contractor. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO QUALITY CONTROL 140000 - 2 1.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND CERTIFICATES OF PROPER INSTALLATION When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, test, adjust, and start-up of equipment, and to initiate instructions when necessary. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 014000 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-1 SECTION 014216 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. General: This section specifies procedural and administrative requirements for compliance with governing regulations and codes and standards imposed upon the Work. These requirements include obtaining permits, licenses, inspections, releases and similar documentation, as well as payments, statements and similar requirements associated with regulations, codes and standards. The term, "Regulations", is defined to include laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful orders issued by governing authorities, as well as those rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry which effectively control the performance of the work regardless of whether they are lawfully imposed by governing authority or not. B. Governing Regulations: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions for requirements related to compliance with governing regulations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions of terms found in other contract documents, including the drawings. (Drawings are recognized as being diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated thereon.) Certain terms used in contract documents are defined in this article. Definitions and explanations contained in this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of contract documents. B. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of other Division sections apply to entire work of the Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements which are included in the project. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated," it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-2 D. Directed, Requested, Etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Engineer," "requested by " Engineer," and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Engineer's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of the Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will an Engineer's approval be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents. In general, the Engineer will “Review” Contractors submittals and work offering, and make comment. F. Install, where not otherwise explained means provide and install. G. Downtime: Related to shutdown of the campus utility system(s). 1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS: A. General: This article is provided to help the user of these specifications more readily understand the format, language implied requirements and similar conventions of content. None of the following explanations shall be interpreted to modify the substance of the contract requirements. B. Specification Format: These specifications are organized based upon the Construction Specifications Institute's 50-Division format. The organization of these specifications into Divisions, Sections or Trade Headings conforms generally to recognized industry practice. C. Divisions are groupings of related or similar sections. The divisions are recognized as the construction industry consensus method of uniform specification organization. D. Sections: For convenience, "Sections" are considered as the basic units of work. The section title is descriptive only and not intended to limit the meaning or content of a section or to be completely descriptive of requirements specified therein. Some sections are actually sub-sections of a more comprehensive delegation, and all sections work under the auspices of general division and global project requirements. There is some coordination between divisions to manage. Mechanical and electrical work cannot be entirely separated as they have points of inter-relationship and mutual dependence. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-3 E. Trade Constraints: In no case is the organization of work into Divisions and Sections to be construed as including or limiting the work elements which may be assigned or performed by a given contractor or subcontractor. All of the work of the project is required of the contractor. While some of the organization of the plans and specifications may follow the format of one or more union labor contracts, such may also not be the case. Qualification and cost to the Owner is a better determinant. Since the Owner is not privy to Contractor relationships, do not draw the Owner/Engineer into discussions of allocation of work items to subcontractors and vendors. Simply move to allocate, direct and complete the contracted work in a forthright manner. 1.5 DRAWING SYMBOLS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on the drawings are those symbols generally recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. 1.6 INDUSTRY STANDARDS: A. Applicability of Standards: Except where more explicit or stringent requirements are written into the contract documents, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound into or copied directly into contract documents. Such industry standards define a minimum expectation, and are made a part of the contract documents by reference. Individual specification sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at the project site for reference. B. Referenced standards (standards referenced directly in the contract documents) take precedence over non-referenced standards that are recognized in the industry for applicability to the Work. C. Non-referenced Standards: Except as otherwise limited by the contract documents, non- referenced standards recognized in the construction industry are defined as having direct applicability to the Work and will be enforced for the performance of the Work. The decision as to whether an industry code or standard is applicable to the Work, or as to which of several standards are applicable, is the sole responsibility of the Engineer. D. Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standard in effect as of date of contract documents. E. Updated Standards: Where an applicable industry code or standard is revised and reissued after the date of the contract documents, but before the performance of the work affected, request clarification of how to proceed. The Engineer will decide whether or not to issue a request for proposed cost adjustment (up or down) in response to the updated standard. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-4 F. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and where these standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be anticipated and enforced, unless the contract documents specifically indicate a less stringent requirement. Identify and refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent, to the Engineer for resolution before proceeding. G. Contractor/subcontractor/worker Experience: The contract documents require that each entity performing work be experienced in that part of the work being performed. Each entity is also required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that part of the work. H. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the specifications or other contract documents they are defined to mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. 1.7 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES: A. General: The procedure followed by the Engineer has been to contact governing authorities where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing contract documents; recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in relation to the Contractor's responsibilities for performing the Work. Contact governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions having a bearing on performance of the Work. B. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, conform with and test in accordance with applicable sections and parts of codes and standards, and most recent revisions and supplements thereto, of the following: 1. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction by the Associated General Contractors of America (AGC). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. National Electrical Code (NEC). (NFPA-70) 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 7. American Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE). 8. International Building Code 9. International Mechanical Code 10. International Plumbing Code 11. National Electrical Code C. Miscellaneous applicable codes and standards not listed above. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-5 1.8 LAWS AND ORDINANCES: Comply with applicable laws, orders, ordinances, practices and requirements of any governmental and private agency under whose jurisdiction work is performed in connection with the contract documents, including the following: A. State of Idaho, various Departments. B. The City of Rexburg, Idaho C. Madison County Idaho D. Rocky Mountain Power Rules and Regulations. E. National Electrical Code 1.9 INSURANCE STANDARDS: To be in accordance with standards, practices and requirements of the State of Idaho. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF THIS SECTION: In event of discrepancies between various codes, ordinances, practices, standards, laws, etc., Engineer's interpretations will be followed. 1.11 PERMITS, LICENSES AND CERTIFICATES: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work. PART II- PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART III - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 014216 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. B. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 3. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. C. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Barricades, warning signs, lights at all trenching and other locations identified as constituting a hazard. 2. Enclosure fence at all excavations trenching (temporary). 3. Storm water capture, retention and disposition, defense against migration of excavated material in the event of a storm. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction: 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Condition of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used for temporary facilities, only. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-2 B. Temporary Open-mesh Fencing: 11 gauge Chain Link Fences and Gates. Where damaged by construction or identified as previous damage, restore to a new equivalent condition. 2.2 EQUIPMENT: A. Temporary Toilet Facilities: Provide local portable toilet facility at the site. As guests, construction personnel may use existing toilet facilities within the plant. All facilities used are to be used and left in a clean condition. B. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. C. Fire Protection Gear: Provide materials including blankets and extinguishers, and firewatch personnel for all activities involving cutting welding or other spark or heat producing work. D. Confined Space Equipment: Be responsible for safety. Respect confined space practices. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION: A. Locate field office, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Area allowed for staging area is shown on the Title Sheet. 1. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. B. Field Office: At Contractors option provide an insulated, weathertight temporary office of sufficient size to accommodate required office/supervisory personnel at the project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. Provide office space complete with heating, air conditioning, lighting, telephone, locked entrance, operable windows, power outlets, plan table, plan rack, 2-drawer letter file for submittals. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-3 Furnish office with complete sets of Construction Drawings, Project Manual, International Building Code, National Electric Code, Building Code, copies of approved Shop Drawings and other submittals, construction photos, color boards and similar reference materials. Sweep and dust area prior to each regularly scheduled Progress Meeting. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, if space is available, sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. D. Sanitary facilities: Provide sanitary facilities including temporary toilets, and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the project's needs. E. Water Distribution: Utilize campus water with hoses as needed. Protect water distribution from freezing, by drainage, insulation or temporary heating. (This may not be a summer season concern. F. Dewatering: Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the work or adjacent properties. Maintain protection against flooding. G. Temporary Heating: Not required. H. Humidity Control: Not required. I. Work Period Power Distribution: Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with ground- fault interruption features, with proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug-in connections as appropriate for intended use. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each circuit at distribution panel. Space 4-gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that every portion of work can be reached with 100' extension cord. J. Temporary Lighting: Provide lighting of intensity and quality sufficient for proper and safe performance of the work, and for access thereto and security thereof. K. Telephone: Not required. Cell phone availability should be adequate. Post listing of operational and emergency telephone numbers at each telephone. L. Hoisting, General: Provide cranes, and/or hoists as needed to adequately perform the work. Take code oriented precautions related to working with high voltage power and overhead powerlines. M. Miscellaneous Facilities: Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including ramps, ladders, runways, staging, shoring, scaffolding, bridges, railings, bracing, barriers, closures, platforms, temporary partitions, waste chutes and similar items. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-4 N. Temporary Support Facilities: 1. General: Provide facilities and services as may be needed to properly support primary construction process and meet governing regulations. Do not use permanent facilities except as otherwise indicated, and except after time of substantial completion. O. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of the size indicated; install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the project. Support on posts or framing of preservative treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. P. Security and Protection: 1. General: Provide facilities and services as necessary to effectively protect project from losses and persons from injury during the course of construction. Q. Fire Protection: In addition to temporary water service for construction, and the placing of permanent fire protection facilities in operating condition at earliest feasible date, provide fire extinguishers of types and sizes recommended by NFPA. Provide Type A extinguishers in Field Offices and for similar exposures; Type ABC in construction areas. Locate extinguishers near each entrance, stairway, and in all areas of potential hazard. Prohibit smoking in any hazardous areas both in the construction zone and adjacent areas. R. Barricades: Provide barricades at hazardous locations, complete with signs, general lighting, warning lights and similar devices when appropriate or required by regulations. S. Temporary Exit Enclosures: The buildings in vicinity of work will remain occupied throughout the construction period. Safe access for staff and the public must be maintained to and from those ares at all hours of the day. U. Fence: Enclose outlined work area with chain-link type fencing, 6'-0" high with lockable entrance gates. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs and other animals from easily entering the site. 1. Use open-mesh, 11 gauge chain-link fencing and gates. 2. To expedite the work, provide additional gate(s) as indicated on the Drawings 3. Keep access to Manwaring loading dock open and available at all times. V. Lock-up and Security: Throughout the work as construction progresses, secure the project against intrusion, Provide temporary security enclosure components as necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-5 W. Environmental Protection: Review exposure to possible environmental problems, with Owner and Engineer. Establish procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil, excessive noise, and similar problems). 3.3 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL: A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Protection: Prevent sensitive project elements from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner/Engineer requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or no later than Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 015000 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017000-1 SECTION 017000 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Submittal of warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions-01 through 33. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting Inspecting for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. O&M Manuals. 3. Submit specific warranties. 4. Submit record drawings. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017000-2 B. Inspection Procedures: On a receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either proceed with Inspecting or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The 1. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. The Engineer will repeat Inspecting when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final Inspecting for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Engineer. B. Re-inspection Procedure: The Engineer will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Engineer. 1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Engineer will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017000-3 B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. 5. Provide electronic copy of utility GPS coordinates. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of potions and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawings information and Product Data. 1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Engineer for the Owner's records. PART II - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING: A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities". B. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017000-4 C. Final Cleaning: After work is complete and surfaces have been restored, make a final broom clean of the area and hose the surfaces to leave a clean finished surface to start the Owner’s takeover. END OF SECTION 017000 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and be- low-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off- site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently re- moved and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cor- nerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protec- tion, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construc- tion of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are unin- terrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupt- ed. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of adjacent buildings. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and delivered to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs and/or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill fa- cility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy buildings adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encoun- tered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immedi- ately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and pro- tect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record docu- ments. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Engineer. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of pre- construction photographs and/or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs and/or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to re- main and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, iden- tify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechani- cal/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, pro- vide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be re- moved and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, re- install, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris- removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walk- ways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demoli- tion area and to and from occupied portions of building. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 2. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoi marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable mate- rials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and re- installed in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, rein- stalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adja- cent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing be- fore selective demolition operations began. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Items to Be Removed: Items and construction as indicated on drawings. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Items and construction as indicated on drawings. C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: Items and construction as indicated on drawings. D. Existing Items to Remain: Items and construction as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 024119 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 1 SECTION 027500 - CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required for concrete work including forming, reinforcing steel, anchor bolts and site concrete. 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. In hot and cold weather, comply with the requirements of ACI 305 and 306. B. Do not place concrete on frozen ground. Unless adequate protection is provided, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow. C. Do not allow rain water to increase mixing water or damage surface finish. D. When temperature of surrounding air is expected to be below 40°F, during placing, or within 24 hours thereafter, do not allow concrete temperature to drop below 55°F, for sections less than twelve inches (12”) in any dimension, or 55°F, for any other sections. 1. Keep the temperature of concrete, when placed, under 80°F, to preclude loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints. 2. When temperature of steel is greater than 120°F, spray steel forms and reinforcement with water just prior to placing concrete. Do not allow any water to pond in forms. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit mix design to be used for each class of concrete. B. Submit location of materials source, admixtures to be used, and other related data. C. Submit test reports showing suitability of aggregates used in concrete mixes. D. Indicate sizes, spacing, locations of reinforcing steel, wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting, and spacing devices. E. Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) test results. F. The Contractor shall pay any material testing expenses associated with material submittals. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Use Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 150 Type II for low alkali cement. B. General Admixtures: Admixtures, other than air-entraining agents, may be used when the type and amount to be used are approved. Calcium chloride will not be allowed as an admixture. C. Air-Entraining Agents: Use air-entraining agents conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 260. Air entraining admixtures shall be added to the mixing water. D. Water Reducing Agents: Water reducing admixtures may be used to increase workability of the concrete when approved by the Engineer. Use water reducing admixtures conforming to ASTM C 494. E. Water: Use potable water for mixing concrete. F. General Aggregate Requirement: The proposed aggregate for the mix shall be tested for expansion and Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR) in accordance with AASHTO T 303. Where testing indicates aggregates are reactive, the contractor shall use fly ash, lithium compound admixtures, or both to produce a concrete mix that successfully mitigates ASR. Contractor shall provide test results of successful mitigation, using ASTM C 1567, with results showing a linear expansion at 14 days not exceeding 0.10 percent when tested. G. Coarse Aggregate: Use coarse aggregate that consists of gravel, crushed slag, crushed stone or other approved inert materials, composed of hard, strong and durable particles, free of injurious coatings, and conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33, except as modified herein. 1. Use only aggregates that include deleterious substances not exceeding the following: Percent (by weight) Soft Fragments 0.20 Coal and Lignite 0.30 Clay Lumps .30 Other Deleterious Substances 2.0 Minus 200 Material 1.75 2. Use coarse aggregate meeting the following gradations when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 136. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 3 Percent Passing (by weight) Course Aggregate Size 1" 3/4” 3/8" No. 4 No. 8 3/4” to No. 4 100 90-100 20-55 1-10 0-5 H. Fine Aggregate: Use aggregate of natural sand or other approved inert materials composed of hard, strong, and durable particles conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 except as modified herein. 1. Use only aggregates that include deleterious substances not exceeding the following: Percent (by weight) Clay Lumps .50 Coal and Lignite .30 Other Deleterious Substances 2.00 Minus 200 Material 1.75 2. Moisture content of fine aggregate shall not exceed 8 percent. 3. Use fine aggregate that is uniformly graded from coarse to fine within the following gradation, when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 136. Sieve Size Percent Passing (by weight) 3/8" 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-60 No. 50 10-30 No. 100 2-10 I. Patch Mortar: Make patching mortar using portland cement and sand to form a workable mortar suitable for filling defects in concrete surfaces. 1. Mortar: 1 part portland cement to 2 parts sand by damp loose volume. 2. Mix white and gray portland cement as required to match surrounding concrete. 3. Keep mixing water to a minimum. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 4 4. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand with frequent manipulation, without addition of water, until it has reached stiffest placeable consistency. J. Curing Compounds: Use curing compounds that meet the requirements of ASTM C 309. K. Sealer Products (Surface applied or Admixture): 1. Conspec Silane 40 or approved equal. 2. Waterproofing Admixture: Xypex Admix C-500. L. Joint Sealant: Use Sikaflex 1c SL or approved equal. Use Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant or approved equal for submerged in water applications. Color to match that of concrete. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL AND WELDED WIRE MESH A. Reinforcement Steel: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 B. Welded Wire Fabric: 12x12 W5.4/5.4 2.3 FORMING MATERIALS A. Smooth Forms: Faced with material which will produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. B. Form accessories that are to be partially or wholly embedded in concrete are to be a commercially manufactured type: 1. Use form ties constructed so that ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing appreciable spalling of concrete faces. C. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. D. Contraction Joint Material: Wood strips; maximum possible length. E. Dobie Blocks: Commercial grade blocks to support horizontal reinforcement. 2.4 READY MIX CONCRETE A. Furnish commercial ready mix shall have the following properties: Construction Type Minimum Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content Maximum Water / Cement Ratio Air Entrainment Percentage Maximum Slump Light Pole, Sign, Fence Foundations 3,000 psi 560 LB/CY 0.49 6.5 ±1.5 4 ±1 Curbs, Gutters 4,000 psi 560 LB/CY 0.44 6.5 ±1.5 2.5 ±1 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 5 Construction Type Minimum Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content Maximum Water / Cement Ratio Air Entrainment Percentage Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement 4,000 psi 560 LB/CY 0.44 6.5 ±1.5 4 ±1 Retaining Walls 4,000 psi 560 LB/CY 0.44 6.5 ±1.5 4 ±1 Walking Surfaces – Sidewalks, Patios, Driveways, Stairs 4,500 psi 564 LB/CY 0.44 6.5 ±1.5 4 ±1 Walking Surfaces with Reinforcement – Sidewalks, Patios, Driveways, Stairs 5,000 psi 611 LB/CY 0.40 6.5 ±1.5 4 ±1 B. Fly ash may be used to replace a portion of the Portland cement in the concrete mix. The fly ash used shall not exceed twenty five percent of the total cement material in the mix. The cement material in the mix includes both Portland cement and fly ash. Fly Ash shall be Class F conforming to AASHTO M 295 with the additional requirement that the available alkalies in the fly ash shall not exceed 2 percent. C. Ready-mixed concrete shall conform to the provisions in ASTM C 94 regarding batching, mixers and agitators, mixing and delivery, inspection, consistency and air content, and certification of batches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall not incorporate ready mix concrete into the work that does not meet these specifications. The ready mix concrete that is in non-compliance shall be removed from the project. 3.2 FORMING A. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of cement paste. Arrange facing material orderly and symmetrical, keeping number of seams to a practical minimum. B. Place chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed surfaces. C. To maintain specified finish tolerances, chamfer formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections. D. Provide positive means of adjustment using wedges or jacks, or shores and struts, and take up all settlement during concrete placing operation. E. Securely brace forms against lateral deflection. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 6 F. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. At construction joints, overlap forms over hardened concrete at least six inches (6"). Hold forms against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain true surface. H. Anchor formwork to shores or other supporting surfaces or members so that upward or lateral movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete placement. I. Position expansion joint material and other embedded items accurately and support against displacement. 3.3 REINFORCING A. Place all reinforcement in the exact position shown on the plans and approved shop drawings and secure in position during the placing and compacting of concrete. Wire bars together with No. 16 gage wire with ties at all intersections except where spacing is less than 12 inches in each direction, in which case tie alternate intersections. B. Place dobie blocks to maintain clearance from subgrade. 3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. B. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb with templates where necessary. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.5 CONVEYING CONCRETE MIX A. Unless specifically approved by the Engineer prior to placement of ready mix concrete, all concrete mix shall be placed and discharged completely within 90 minutes of the introduction of water into the mix or before the drum has been revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first. B. Handle concrete from mixer to location of final placing as rapidly as practicable by methods which prevent segregation or loss of ingredients, and assure that quality is maintained. C. Use only equipment conforming to ASTM C 94. D. Use only approved pumping equipment that is rated for the lift and the capacity required for placement. 1. Control pneumatic placement to prevent segregation. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 7 2. Loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed two inches (2”). 3. Do not use aluminum or aluminum alloy pipes. 3.6 CONTROL JOINTS A. For flatwork, place control (contraction) joints of the type indicated in the plans prior to concrete curing. B. Install joints spaced no more than 24 times the slap thickness (i.e. a 4-inch thick slab shall have a control joint at least every 96-inches = 8-feet). Contraction joints should be placed to produce panels that are as square as possible and never exceeding a length to width ratio of 1 ½ to 1 C. Joint depth shall be at least 25% of slab depth. D. Tooled joints shall be installed using a grooving tool. Contraction joints may be tooled into the concrete surface at the time of placement. Joints may be tooled into the surface (first pass) prior to the onset of bleeding or immediately with the first pass of the floating operation. E. Sawcut joints between 6-12 hours after finishing concrete, unless specifically approved otherwise by the engineer. Sawcut as soon as the concrete is hard enough to withstand the energy of sawing without raveling or dislodging aggregate particles, and that the edges abutting the cut do not chip from the saw blade. 3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork for columns, walls, and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal. 3.8 FINISHES A. Provide formed concrete walls to be left exposed with Sacked Finish. 1. Point and Patch: Patch defects, chip or rub off fins exceeding one-quarter inch (1/4) in height with Patch Mortar. Patch tie holes and defects and remove fins completely. When surface texture is impaired and form joints misaligned by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch, grind or bushhammer. 2. Sacked Finish: Remove forms and perform necessary patching as soon after placement as possible. Finish newly hardened concrete no later than the day following form removal. Wet surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are produced. No cement grout to be used other than cement paste drawn from concrete by rubbing process. B. Concrete flatwork shall not be trowelled, use screed, float, and broom. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 8 C. Stairs to receive a light broom finish parallel to the nose of the tread. And shall receive nose end treatment as shown in the plans. D. Sidewalks to receive a light broom finish perpendicular to the direction of travel. E. Patios to receive light broom finish. F. Curbs and Gutter to receive light broom finish parallel to flow line of gutter. G. Pedestrian ramps to receive a light broom finish perpendicular to the direction of travel. H. Light pole, sign, fence foundations to receive light broom finish. 3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION A. To preserve moisture in unformed concrete surfaces, apply one of the following immediately after placement and finishing. 1. Continuous mist spray. 2. Waterproof sheet materials, ASTM C 171. 3. Curing compound, ASTM C 309. Apply in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer immediately after water sheen has disappeared. Do not use on any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded or adhesively applied, unless it is proven that curing compound will not prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. Provide curing compound compatible with hardener in areas where hardener is to be used. B. Cure concrete for seven (7) days. C. When mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 40°F, maintain temperature of concrete between 50°F and 70°F for required curing period. 3.10 SEALER A. For surface application, apply sealer to vertical walls, stairs, and walkways. Apply two coats. Apply in accordance with manufactures recommendations. Sealer should be applied for walkways where salt/deicer is applied, normally about 30 days after pour. B. For admixture, Xypex Admix must be added to concrete mix at time of batching. Under normal conditions, the crystalline waterproofing powder shall be added to the concrete mix at the following rates: Xypex Admix C-500: 2 - 3% by weight of Portland cement content. For enhanced chemical protection or meeting specific project requirements, or where the concrete mix design contains higher than 20% fly ash content or includes a portland 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 027500 - 9 cement/slag cement blend, consult with manufacturer or its authorized representative to determine appropriate dosage rates. 3.11 TESTING A. The owner shall obtain and pay for the services of certified materials testing laboratory to perform all sampling and testing of installed materials to assure that the requirements of this specification are met. The Contractor shall pay all testing costs associated with product submittal prior to use in the Work. B. Perform the following testing: 1. Entrained Air – Test every 30 yards of concrete delivered to the project. 2. Slump – Test every 30 yards of concrete delivered to the project. 3. Strength characteristics – Test every 30 yards of concrete placement with four compressive test cylinders. 4. Temperature: If air temperature is less than 40°F, test every 30 yards of concrete delivered. C. Test results shall be reported in writing to the Engineer within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. D. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 3.12 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Scaled or spalled surfaces exceeding 5% (randomly dispersed or concentrated) per twenty (20) square feet of concrete surfacing area will be considered defective and shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The area requiring replacement will be as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 027500 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1 SECTION 230000 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to the work of this section. B. Related Sections: Refer to “Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” Section in Division 230513 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special and specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section. 1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and supplements the requirements of Division 01. This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described herein is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The mechanical work described in these mechanical specifications is for three projects located at Brigham Young University Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho. Design weather conditions are: 89o db, 61o wb, and winter -30oF. Altitude readings, unless otherwise noted, are for an elevation of 4,950 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to manufacturer's performance data as needed. 1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION: A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the various codes, ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project location in effect on the date of invitation for bids. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern. B. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and Engineer free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances. C. Permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract shall be secured by the contractor(s) and paid by the owner. D. REFERENCE STANDARDS: American Welding Society International Mechanical Code/State Code International Building Code/State Code International Energy Conservation Code SMACNA Duct Design Standards Local/State Plumbing Code Locally enforced NFPA Codes Local Fuel Utility Regulations Local Power Utility Regulations 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2 American Gas Association ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping ANSI B31.1 Piping E. Final inspection by the Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction are delivered. 1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The mechanical drawings at reduced scale show the general arrangement of piping, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The civil and electrical drawings shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. Request clarification and participate in resolution in the event of conflict. Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly, providing such extensions, fittings, valves and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. Some small scale work is not shown such as control conduit and piping, incidental piping, specialties. Provide as directed by note or specification. Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to make such examination. During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed nor allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work. 1.6 ROUGH-IN: A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 35 for rough-in requirements. 1.7 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS: A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3 E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. I. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. J. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc., penetration shall be neatly cut and walls shall be filled and patched. K. All materials exposed within a return air plenum shall either be noncombustible or have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a max smoke developed index of 50. 1.8 ACCESSIBILITY: A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance. Respect manufacturers recommendations for access and clearance. 1.9 CHANGE ORDERS: See General Conditions. 1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow. Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised. The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which could save time and effort. These may be presented to the Engineer with a breakdown of possible cost savings for review. Implement only with authorization. Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After bidding, substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and implemented only with authorization. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING: 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4 A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and blockouts, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate mechanical installations. Cut and patch only as needed. B. Refer to the Division 01 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 26 Section: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of mechanical installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; 2. Remove and replace defective Work; 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing: 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. H. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work. I. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. J. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. K. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 1.12 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only from the Contractor to the Engineer. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Engineer will not be processed. Document each transmittal and sign and stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the criteria of the project, any exceptions being clearly noted. A. Shop Drawings: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5 Engineer, one complete digital copy of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project. Written confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before ordering, purchasing, acquiring or installing any such equipment or materials for the project. Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification with identification tabs for each item or group of related items. Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, utility requirements, dimensions of size, connection points and other information pertinent to effective review. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for equipment installed. Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished with unit. Review of the Engineer is for general conformance of the submitted equipment of the project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions which may affect his work. B. Record Drawings: During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings, specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked-up documents over to the Engineer at the conclusion of the work so that the original tracings can be revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, reimburse the Engineer for time required to do so. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING: A. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: At a time prior to Owner making use of a device or system, and in general after testing and balance work for a building or major system is complete, prepare, schedule and conduct a series of training sessions for Owner's operating and supervisory personnel. Instructions shall cover each device and system with emphasis on understanding of the purpose and function, the maintenance requirements and the proper adjustment and operating technique. B. Instruct building operating staff in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing. C. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows: 1. Mechanical - two hours per project. 2. Temperature Control - two hours per project. Programming help as needed. 3. Variable frequency drives - one hour per project with VFD’S D. Initial instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. Schedule subsequent visits with the Owner’s Building Operation Personnel throughout the first year. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6 E. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. F. Vendors for each piece of equipment controls, etc., shall participate along with the Contractor(s). 1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is binding on the part of the Contractor and his assigns: "Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract and is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General Conditions of these specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be guaranteed for one full year from the date of recommission." Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl covered, insert sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M Manual. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. Mechanical systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction for at least thirty (30) working days. 1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required. 1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions. See Paragraph 1.4. 1.17 AVAILABLE SPACE COORDINATION: Carefully coordinate available space with all trades.. Respect clearances required for electrical panels, fences, structure, etc. 1.18 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the owner’s construction coordinator not less than 72 hours prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption. Do not leave a building or system without cooling unless authorized by the owner. PART II - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific equipment shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the Contractor's bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7 Conditions. All materials shall be produced by manufacturing plants located in the United States of America. B. Furnish and install all major items of equipment specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed, and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation. 2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash during the course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. Existing plumbing fixtures shall not be used by the construction forces. At the completion of the work, clean fixtures, equipment and materials and polish thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make damage and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at Contractor's expense. 2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN: A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction. B. Employ no unskilled persons in the work which he is given to do; execute all work in a skillful and workmanlike manner. All persons employed upon this work shall be competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall dismiss him and he shall not be again employed upon the work without permission of the Owner's Representative. C. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written verification of successful test completion shall be submitted to Engineer prior to initiating work. 2.4 FOREMAN: Dedicate and designate a full-time general mechanical foreman to the Owner's Representative to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for consultation. Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's Representative. 2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing between trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor, i.e., supply fans, variable speed drives, etc., the same. Do not burden the Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL): A. Provide hangers and/or supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary information is contained in these specifications and on the drawings. B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation. 2.7 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall direct adjustments as deemed necessary and desirable. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8 2.8 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage to equipment and bearings while the equipment is being operated by him consequent to preacceptance operation. 2.9 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL: A. In general, motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under Division 26 of this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned to be furnished by the Division 23 either in these specifications or on the electrical or mechanical drawings, shall be furnished and mounted by this Contractor and shall be connected under and as required by this Division 23 and Division 26 of these specifications. B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor. C. Division must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to insure that all required components of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of coordination. D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary controls for air handling equipment specified for this project. The objective of this paragraph is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner for field wiring required related to the equipment. 2.10 JOBSITE CLEANUP: A. Keep site clean during progress of work. B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly. 1. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or repaint if necessary. 2. Remove all debris from site. END OF SECTION 230000 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 1 SECTION 230100 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Furnish two sets of bound and four discs of the operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: A. General: 1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and data that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals, complete with drawings and data, shall be furnished to BYU Idaho Physical Plant. 2. The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data and compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or equipment purchased by the University and delivered to the contractor for installation. 3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A. 4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed. B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign. PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 16 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch. 2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8- 1/2" x 11" manilla pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manilla pocket. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 2 2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic cover and backbone for slip in title information 2" to 3" rings as required for the project. The number of binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 2-1/2" thickness. A. Place the following information on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper to slip into plastic covers on front and backbone: 1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual". 2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume). 3. Project Number (Seven Digit University project number). 4. Building name and number. 5. “BYU Idaho”. 6. Engineer's name. 7. General Contractor’s name. 8. Mechanical Contractor's name. 9. Items 6 and 7 need not be printed on the backbone. 2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING: A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation. B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section additional indexing of component parts may be required. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows: 1. Copy of purchase order change (if any). 2. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems. 3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves. 4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan number. 5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included. 6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model numbers and plan symbols. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230100 - 3 7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into the following suggested parts: a. Part I Building and System Descriptions b. Part II Purchased Equipment Data c. Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts d. Part IV Start-Up and Operation e. Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations 8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment. 9. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports. 10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol. 11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained. END OF SECTION 230100 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEMOLITION 230205 - 1 SECTION 230205 - DEMOLITION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Remove noted pieces of equipment, piping, etc. relating to existing mechanical systems in the remodel areas of the three projects which are made obsolete by their remodels. B. Maintain existing installations which continues in service or is adapted C. Adapt existing installation to new conditions, i.e., remove and reinstall piping which must be offset or revised to accommodate new installation, layouts, etc. 1.2 REFERENCES: A. Respond to General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Division 01, etc. B. Respond to General Requirements of Technical Divisions. 1.3 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. The work in this project is in the existing Data Center Chiller Yard of the Kimball Building, the Chiller Yard and Mechanical Room of the Taylor Building and the roof of the Central Energy Facility. A portion of the existing piping, and controls will be modified, replaced, altered and removed on each project. The contractor is to be familiar with existing conditions in and around each building. Each building is to be restored to full service. The work on each of these projects will occur when the buildings are occupied. New equipment, piping and material must be onsite for each project prior to starting construction on a specific project. Keep down time to a minimum. 1.4 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING: A. SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary systems or utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the owner’s construction coordinator not less than 72 hours prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption. B. The three projects may or may not occur at the same time. The work on the Taylor Building must be done when outside air can be used to cool the building. The work on the Kimball Building Data Center must occur when the backup Computer Room Air Conditioning Units can be used to cool the Data Center. The work on the Central Energy Facility must be done when the cooling provided by the air cooled chiller is not needed. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DEMOLITION 230205 - 2 PART II - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT: A. Remove all equipment rendered obsolete by this work, and as designated on the drawings. Dispose of removed material off-site. Keep inactive openings covered and protected from damage, contamination, etc. Cap and seal active openings to insure building system functions are maintained to the remainder of the building. 3.2 PIPING: A. Remove all piping and equipment rendered obsolete by this work, and as designated on the drawings. Dispose of removed material off-site. Keep inactive openings covered and protected from damage, contamination, etc. Cap and seal active openings to insure building system functions are maintained to the remainder of the building. 3.3 CONTROLS: A. Disconnect existing controls and terminate ready to me reconnected to new control devices. 3.4 Contractor shall be responsible to remove glycol from existing chilled water system and store. The contractor will also be responsible to clean, flush and fill with inhibited propylene glycol as noted in Section 232500. END OF SECTION 230205 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 1 SECTION 230513 - MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 26. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by this Division and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches, etc. B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are noted within these documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled. B. Provide variable speed drives which conform to the latest standard of the following: 1. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 2. NEC - National Electrical Code. 3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 4. Provide complete packaged unit(s) which are listed and carry the label of at least one of the following: a. UL - Underwriters Laboratory b. ETL - ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. c. CSA - Canadian Standards Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete product and application information for variable speed drives as follows: 1. Provide multiple sets of drawings of system (VFD) being supplied, in strict compliance with the specifications. Include, as a minimum: a. General arrangement of each unit showing size and incoming and outgoing conduit locations. b. Schematic diagrams and drawings. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 2 c. Connection diagram, sufficient to install drive system. 2. Provide each unit with four owner/maintenance manuals which shall include: a. Vendor information of equipment being supplied. b. Connection information. c. Start up procedure. d. Fault reset instruction. e. Wiring diagrams (power and control). f. Parts list. g. Test results. h. Harmonic voltage distortion on line with unit off. i. Harmonic voltage distortion with unit on line. B. Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with submittal. Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service factor. Include this data in maintenance manual in accordance with Section "Operation and Maintenance Manuals". 1.5 REFERENCES: A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators. B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. D. NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches. E. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 1.6 WARRANTY: A. General: For variable frequency drives. Furnish a written warranty consisting of the following: 1. Warranty parts and labor for five years after substantial completion. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 3 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS: A. Motor scheduled for connection to variable frequency drives shall be invertor duty rated. B. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3. Single speed motors of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC) 4. Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40oC environment with maximum 90oC temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude, Class B leads allowed). 5. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 evenly timed spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors. 6. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0 for TEFC motors. 7. Pump motors with an end shield with ventilation openings beneath the motor. 8. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general Purpose, continuous duty, design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque. 9. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. 10. Bearings: a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor; d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted; 11. Enclosure Type: a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 4 b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants; c. Weather protected type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed; 12. Overload Protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 13. Noise Rating: "Quiet" 14. Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors used with Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with Variable Frequency Drives. Any “explosion proof” motor for classified areas, scheduled for use with VFD’s, shall be listed for invertor duty applications. 15. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer. ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 16. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Baldor (Preferred) b. Century c. General Electric d. Marathon e. U.S. Motors f. Westinghouse. 2.2 MOTOR DRIVES: A. Provide flexible coupled drives for pumps by Browning, Dodge or Woods. B. Provide a galvanized iron metal guard for each coupled drive or rotating shaft constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. Design the guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: A. General: Furnish and install Variable Frequency Drives (motor speed controllers) with associated control signal components, harmonic filtering, power factor compensation and related cabinets, devices, ventilation, etc. Sizes and capacity as schedule on the drawings. Rate drives for constant torque application with variable torque application capability. Drive shall be warrantied for parts and labor for 5 years after substantial completion. Drives shall be wired for full VFD rating. 1. Verify compatibility of each VFD System being supplied with the related equipment motor. If a new motor is being supplied supply the VFD to match the new motor(s) and warranty the Drive to be compatible with that motor. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 5 2. Furnish each system in a NEMA 1 enclosure either wall-mounted or free standing, with fan forced, filtered ventilation. 3. Furnish each system with silk screened or engraved labels on all door operator and pilot devices, attached with screws, rivets or adhesive. 4. Provide an electrical shock warning label on each system to warn personnel that a potential of electric shock exists. 5. Supply each system complete, wired with all components assembled in a single enclosure including, but not limited to the VFD units, contactors, door interlocked circuit breaker. Units requiring mounting and interwiring of separate bypass enclosure are not under this specification. 6. Supply a complete set of engineering drawings consisting of, as a minimum, general arrangement, power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and schematic of VFD System components, options, and equipment and tests included to meet power quality requirements of the specification. 7. Furnish an owner's manual consisting of catalog sheets showing actual components and parts numbers. Manual shall also show test certificates, warranty and service personnel responsible for warranty. 8. Furnish factory trained VFD System installation and start-up and warranty service. Mount unit and connect to power supply, mount and wire remote devices. B. Construction: Assemble the Variable Frequency Drive units and components in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 1. Each Variable Frequency Drive inverter shall be altitude compensated and sized for the elevation at which the unit will be installed. The inverter shall operate in an ambient temperature of -10oC to 50oC and a humidity of 0 to 90 percent non- condensing. 2. Mount each Variable Frequency Drive inverter unit on a removable panel along with all other components such that, if required, the panel can be removed from the enclosure for maintenance or part replacement. 3. Mount the door with a minimum of two hinges with removable pins. Door shall be rigid and large doors shall have additional hinges and stiffening steel. 4. Paint enclosure, two coats over primer, with high grade enamel, a minimum of 50-70 microns thick. 5. The enclosure shall be force ventilated and the exhaust ports covered with louvers. All components of the system, except sensors, shall be contained in this single enclosure as an integrated package. 6. Door mounted operator devices shall be industrial, oil tight, equivalent to control center devices. 7. Control power for operator devices and customer connections shall be 120 volts. The control power transformer shall be a "Machine Tool" type and have both primary and secondary fusing. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 6 C. Standard Features: Provide the following features as standard on all VFD units furnished. 1. Each VFD unit shall be a solid state AC to DC converter sinusoidal pulse-width modulation (PWM) type, with an altitude adjusted horsepower rating equal to or greater than the motor HP that the unit is supplying or not less than the scheduled rating, whichever is greater. 2. Electrical characteristics: a. Input Voltage 460 VAC +/- 10% (Nominal 480 Volts) b. Input Frequency 60 Hz +/- 5% 3. Motor braking torque available by means of regenerative braking. 4. An output frequency clamp such that minimum or maximum output frequency can be set at desired limits. 5. Rated overload current shall be 150% for one minute. 6. Each VFD shall have an adjustable acceleration/deceleration time setting from one second to 120 seconds. 7. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better displacement power factor over the entire speed range. 8. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better output/input efficiency over the entire speed range. 9. Each VFD shall be supported with a door interlocked input disconnect motor circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient to start the motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a minimum setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode. The door mounted handle shall be lockable in the off position. 10. Each VFD shall be supported with the following door mounted operator controls as a minimum: a. Hand/Off/Auto Switch - keyed switch required. b. Local/Remote Switch - keyed switch required. c. Frequency Setting - through programmable controller pad. d. Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed - through programmable controller pad. e. Power on Light f. VFD Enable Light g. VFD Fault Light h. External Fault Light (safeties interlock) 11. Each VFD shall be supplied with a minimum of the following protective features with an alarm display indication: a. Overcurrent Shut-off b. Regenerative Overvoltage c. Electronic Thermal Protector d. Heatsink Overheat 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 7 e. Instantaneous Power Failure f. Ground Fault 12. The following termination points on terminal strip for field connections: a. Safeties Interlock b. Remote Start/Stop Contact c. Remote VFD Fault Contacts (N.C.) d. Remote VFD/Bypass Enable Contacts (N.O.) e. Remote Electronic Signal Input 13. Auto restart initiation by means of an automatic time delayed restart after recovering from undervoltage or loss of power. The inverter shall have auto restart compatibility with power provided by standby engine generator system provide all required components to insure compatibility to operate on standby engine power. The invertor shall not automatically restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, overtemperature, or any other damaging conditions but shall require a manual restart. 14. Remote input signal connection terminals (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC = 0-100% speed or 4-20 mA = 20-100% Speed). D. Additional Configuration Features: 1. Bypass Option: Equip the inverter with a manual bypass contactor arrangement for transfer to the feeder line to operate at constant speed. The contactors shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked and supplied with an adjustable motor overload. 2. Provide a VFD isolation switch to allow maintenance on the VFD while in the bypass mode. Furnish prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors, VFD isolation switch, motor overload VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass ON light. 3. Digital or Analog Ammeter, through programmable key pad. 4. Digital or Analog Voltmeter, through programmable key pad. 5. Frequency Jump: Furnish a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point of resonance with the natural frequency of the machine. 6. Provide series line reactors for harmonic distortion control as standard equipment. 7. Drive Speed Control, I/E or I/I or E/E or E/I transducers as needed. 8. Synchronous transfer to allow transfer from VFD to utility line and back to VFD unit while motor is running. 9. Computer interface option through the addition of a RS 232 data card. 10. Remote Digital/Analog Speed Meter with 4-20 ma signal. Locate at central control console. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 8 E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers of VFD equipment shall meet the following requirements. 1. Suppliers of VFD Systems must be in the primary business of supplying Variable Frequency Drives and have a minimum of five (5) years of service in that business. 2. Vendor must have local service center with factory spare parts inventory and factory authorized service technician on call 24 hours/day. 3. VFD units supplied in response to this specification shall be labeled by UL, CSA or ETL. Note, the entire unit shall carry the label not just a component. 4. The following VFD suppliers are acceptable providing that all points of this specification are adhered to: a. ABB b. Energy Management Corporation using Mitsubishi drives. 5. VFD vendors must have prior approval from Owner before quoting equipment specified. If not listed above, vendor must apply to Owner for approval 10 days prior to bid date showing point by point compliance with this specification including sample of typical harmonic voltage distortion test report. In compliance with general requirements of the specification. F. Testing: Prior to shipping, test each unit and submit certified test report with each unit. Standard tests to include: 1. Visual inspection, consisting of checking unit enclosure, wiring, connections, fasteners, covers and locking mechanism. 2. High pot test; two (2)X rated voltage plus 1000 volts AC for 60 seconds shall be applied per UL 508 on all perifial drive system power components (circuit breakers, contactors, motor overloads, line reactors, disconnect switches, etc.) as a complete package. A copy of test results shall be included in operation manuals. 3. Motor run test. 4. Control panel devices, test all devices and lights. 5. Optional equipment, test optional equipment specified with VFD system. 6. Special tests, as required and specified. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES & ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 230513 - 9 G. Installation: Field mounting pad and power connections shall be provided by contractor. 1. Vendor shall supply field start-up service by an authorized factory service representative consisting of system check-out, start-up and system run. The vendor shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including operator training. A written certificate of same shall be provided at start-up. Provide written certified start-up report. VFD service technicians shall be full time employees of the vendor or manufacturer, primarily engaged in VFD service work during normal business hours but on call 24 hours. Start-up by sales representative is not acceptable. 2. Startup/adjustment effort shall have at least two segments. a. Prior to Test and Balance work to place equipment in operation. b. At conclusion of Test and Balance work to adjust units to actual operating conditions. 3. The following adjustments and tests shall be performed as a minimum with certified copies included in the maintenance and operation manual. a. Verify that the input voltage is within the manufacturer's specification tolerances. b. Verify that the motor rotation is correct in all modes of operation. c. Verify all operator devices, programming and monitoring functions to be fully operational. d. Verify operation of all field signal control connections. e. Measure and record system output voltage and current at 50% and 100% speed. Tune the output voltage to correspond to motor nameplate rating at full speed. Check full load current measurements against nameplate data. f. Make all parameter adjustments to tune and optimize the VFD system to the application. Record all configuration values as part of this report. g. Conduct harmonic tests as identified in the specification. Measurements shall be recorded for each unit with the VFD system off, running at 50% speed, and running at full speed and load. END OF SECTION 230513 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 1 SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to thermometers and pressure gauges specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in this and other Division-23 sections. B. Meters and gauges specified in this section include the following: 1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings. a. Digital Thermometers. b. Thermometer Wells. c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs. 2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings. a. Pressure Gauges. b. Pressure Gauge Valves. c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of thermometers and/or pressure gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Temperature and Pressure Gauge Types: Provide temperature and pressure gauges of same type by same manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of thermometer and pressure gauge. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 2 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of thermometer and pressure gauge. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIGITAL THERMOMETERS: A. General: Provide digital thermometers, designed and constructed for use in service indicated variable angle, light powered. B. Case: High impact ABS. C. Range: -40/300 F. D. Display: 3/8" LLD digits. E. Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1 F, whichever is greater. F. Resolution: 1/10 between -19.9 /199.9 F. G. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer. H. Lux Rating: 10 lux. I. Update: 10 seconds. J. Ambient Operating: -30/110 F. K. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor. L. Stem Assembly: Industrial Glass. M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers of one of the following: 1. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Weksler 3. Trerice 2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS: A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers. 2.3 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS: A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 degrees F (93 degrees C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with ½" 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 3 NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gauge connector plugs of one of the following: 1. Peterson Equipment Co. 2. SISCO 3. Universal 4. Flow Design 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES: (Liquid Filled) A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Liquid filled. B. Type: Liquid filled for use with temperature up to 200 F. C. Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel case with polished stainless steel bayonet ring. D. Dial: White aluminum with black markings. E. Window: Clear acrylic. F. Tube: Phosphor bronze. G. Socket: Brass with restrictor. H. Pointer: Black anodized aluminum, adjustable. I. Movement: Stainless steel rotary type with bushings. J. Accuracy: 1% of full scale. K. Connection: 1/4" male NPT, Provide pressure snubber, for water service. L. Range: Conform to the following; place operating pressure in mid-range. 1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi - 30 psi, as needed. 2. Water: 0 - 100 psi - 160 psi, as needed. 3. Steam 0 - 25 psi – 160 psi as needed. M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one of the following: 1. U.S. Gauge 2. Marsh Instrument Co./Marshalltown 3. Trerice. 4. Weiss. 5. Weksler. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 4 2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE VALVES: A. General: Provide pressure gauge valves between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping systems. Construct gauge valve of brass bar stock with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and knurled handle brass plug or use 1/4" ball valve or Crane 88 needle valve (for steam). B. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES: A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At inlet and outlet of chiller. 2. Across each pump and strainer. C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap. D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES: A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge bar stock valve located on pipe at most readable position. B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump, single gauge, mani-folded to include inlet strainer. 2. At inlet and outlet of chiller. C. Pressure Gauge Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber for water. D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. END OF SECTION 230519 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 230523 - 1 SECTION 230523 - VALVES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Valves section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to valves specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of valves specified in section include the following: 1. Drain Valves. 2. Ball Valves. 3. Butterfly Valves. 4. Check Valves. 5. Swing Check. 6. Miscellaneous Valves. C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. C. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked on valve body. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 230523 - 2 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions". 2. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or welded-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 "Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves". 3. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which are UL-listed and FM approved. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 4" and smaller. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 6" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves 8'-0" and higher above finished floor. D. Connections: Unless otherwise noted for a particular reason, any valve 2" and larger shall have flanges. For grooved joint steel pipe in 6" and larger sizes, convert to flanged pipe, use indicated ball or butterfly valves. 2.2 GLYCOL CHILLED WATER: A. Ball Valves: 1. Steel piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF, bronze construction, threaded ends, bubble tight mineral filled PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard, stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Crane, Keystone, Powell, Nibco/Scott, Milwaukee, Grinnell. All valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. No other manufacturers approved. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 230523 - 3 2. Copper piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF bronze construction, threaded or solder ends, bubble tight mineral filled. PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for tight shut-off. Watts B-6000-SS or B-6001-SS, Apollo 70-100 or 70-200, Milwaukee BA-100S or BA-150S, Hammond, Belimo. No other manufacturer approved. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection. B. Butterfly Valves: 1. For piping 3" and larger. Install with weld neck flanges, Norris Series R-3011- 23SS-2B, double tapped lug, single-flange ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 SS disc, stainless steel shaft with extended neck for insulated pipe, EPDM seat and O-rings, indicating worm gear operator, 175 psig bubble tight pressure rating (250 where required). Demco, Keystone, Rockwell, Grinnell, Bray, ABZ, Hammond or Milwaukee. 2. Use Bray valves on Central Energy Facility to match existing. C. Swing Check Valves: 1. 2" and Smaller: Bronze, threaded, Y-pattern, 200# WOG at swing check valve. Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, 200# WOG swing check valve with bronze trim. Approved manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Nibco. D. Non-Slam Check Valves for Pump Discharge: 1. 2" and Smaller: 125 psig WSP, silent, spring loaded, all stainless steel. Durabla or approved equal by valve and Primer Corporation. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 125 psig WSP, silent, semi-steel body, bronze trim and discs, bronze seats with center guide and renewable with reseating with special tools, guided spring. Spring shall operate in horizontal, vertical, angular, or upside down position. Approved manufacturers: Nibco/Scott, Smolensky, Clow 363, Miller, Bell and Gosset, Mueller, Metraflex, and Armstrong NWS. E. Balancing Cocks: 1. 2" and Smaller: 175 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, screwed ends, wrench operated, lubricated. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 200 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, flanged ends, wrench operated, lubricated. F. Balancing Valves: Circuit balancing valve with venturi and pressure taps. Do not use gate valves or butterfly valves as balancing valves. Provide schedule showing pressure drop and flow rate of each valve. Flow Set Accusetter, Armstrong, Gerand, Griswold. If improperly sized balance valves are found during the test and balance work, the improperly sized balanced valves shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or project. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 230523 - 4 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: A. AIR VENT VALVES: Stockham B-64, 300 psi working pressure, 3/8" bronze or Crane No. 88, Watson McDonnel, Metraflex, Bell & Gossett. B. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: For making up to heating systems, Watts No. 223U, capacity as noted. C. WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES: For relief for heating system, Bell and Gossett No. 480, Watts, pressure setting as required. D. GAUGE VALVES: Crane #88 bronze needle valve or Trerice barstock needle valve, or ball valve. E. REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: Complete with isolation valve and strainer upstream and insulation valve downstream. Watts 009 Series. PART III - INSTALLATION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION: A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate maintenance. B. Install valves with stems horizontal or above. C. Provide chain operators for any valves located more than 8 feet above finished floor. This means double acting lever handles for quarter turn valves, or chain wheels for multi- turn valves. Arrange valves and set up chain length for proper operation. D. All branch lines which supply a specific area of the building (such as a toilet room) shall be valved near the main so that each area may be isolated from the system for repairs without having to shut down both men and women's restrooms, other areas, or the whole building. E. Make all valves located above a non-lay-in type ceiling or behind a wall accessible by means of an access door. F. Valve should be installed with bonnets at least 45 degrees above the horizontal to ensure debris does not collect in bonnet. END OF SECTION 230523 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 1 SECTION 230529 - MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Supporting Devices section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments and In-Beds. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. 7. Equipment Supports. 8. Anchors. 9. Equipment Supports. C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. D. Relate this section to Section 23 05 48 regarding seismic and vibration control. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 2 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved. 3. MSS Standard Compliance: a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. B. Adjustable Steel Clevises Hangers: MSS Type 1. (For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines; 1/2" to 30".) C. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. (For suspension of pipe requiring up to 4" of insulation and where flexibility of clamp is desirable; 3/4" to 24".) D. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. (For suspension of cold pipe lines or hot lines where little or no insulation is required; 1/2" to 24".) E. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. (For suspension of piping when off-center closure allowing installation of hanger before erection of piping is desired; 1/2" to 4".) 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 3 F. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) G. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) H. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe liens; 1/2" to 8".) I. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 8".) J. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) K. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) L. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. (For support of heavy loads; 1/2" to 30".) M. Clips: MSS Type 26. (For support of uninsulated piping not subject to expansion or contraction.) N. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base- support and cast-iron floor flange. (To support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor 4" to 36".) O. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. (To Type 36 except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe.) 2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. (For support and steadying of pipe risers; 3/4" to 20". Also supports pipe covering or insulation.) C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. (When longer ends are required for riser clamps.) 2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 4 B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.) C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.) D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.) E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments.) 2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS AND IN-BEDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.) C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist construction, for attachment to top flange of structural shape.) D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.) E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams.) F. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.) G. C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.) H. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange.) I. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.) J. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) K. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.) M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: 1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds. 2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 5 3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds. N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.) O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired.) P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movements where head room is limited. Q. Refer to drawings for Unistrut inserts. 2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; see section Mechanical Insulation for void fill requirements. Use for roller supports and on all pipes 10" and larger. C. Protection Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation. D. Thermal Hanger Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation. E. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of one of the following: 1. Elcen Metal Products Co. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: 1. Kin-Line, Inc. 2. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International 3. ITT Grinnel Corp. 4. B-Line 5. Unistrut 2.7 HIGH HUMIDITY AREAS: Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories in boiler rooms or other high humidity areas. 2.8 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories for all outside areas. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 6 C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. Use Embeco grout for non-shrink applications. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from factory built channel (Unistrut) system and use factory fasteners for channel steel shapes, selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. 1. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 7 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape. D. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G. Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. I. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long minimum) at support points. J. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 230529 - 8 C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work of Division 15. Size bases to extend a minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. C. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 7; not work of this section. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 230529 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 1 SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL PART I - GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Seismic Control section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work installed under Division 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment. Work to be responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective seismic zone. Zone 3, importance factor of 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following: 1. Amber Booth 2. Kinetics 3. Mason - West B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a minimum of two specific periods. 1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved devices. 2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device installation and preparing certification of the seismic vibration- isolation work. C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor concerning: 1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment. 2. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements. 3. Snubbing of equipment. 4. Bracing and anchoring of piping and conduit. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 2 5. Provision for expansion of piping. D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete. E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection, equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint locations and type of restraints. B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints. D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed. E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United States. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition) 1. International Building Code 2. NFPA bulletin 90A, 3. UL Standard 181 4. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems. Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROL 230548 - 3 PART II - PRODUCTS: 2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist seismic forces in all directions. A. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints shall allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4" clearance both horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality Assurance (QA) Program. B. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used where equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers. Isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure. C. Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members. 1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE: A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except as noted.) END OF SECTION 230548 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Label all air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters for all mechanical equipment. PART II - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION: A. Equipment: 1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or in these specifications. Make equipment nameplates of black face formica with white engraved lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely. 2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable: Identification name. Identification number. Capacity specified. Actual capacity. Area or zone served. Note operating conditions, including head, motor horsepower at design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant, frequency of lubrication. B. Valve Identification: 1. For all valves, regardless of size, provide brass tags at least 1-1/4" by 3" in size and 0.051 inches thick. Use engraved lettering at least 1/8" high. Identify each valve on the drawing separately, and with valve tags matching the drawing identification. 2. Provide valve tags which include the following minimum information: a. Normal Position b. Duty 3. Identify tag numbers as follows: Valve Tags Duty 100 CHW 4. Make a schedule of all tagged valves, include in O & M Manuals. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 2 5. Connect valve tags to valve stems with brass chain. C. Color code all accessible duct and piping and identify with wording and arrows every 50 feet, at each riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily identify the medium transported. D. Identify duct and piping systems by: 1. Lettering color, and 2. Flow Direction Arrow. 3. Identifying lettering shall be painted or stenciled on duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue-on type labels are acceptable. Letters shall be 2" high for duct and for 3" or larger piping, 1" high for 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" pipe, and 1/2" high for 1" pipe and smaller. 4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be painted or stenciled on the duct or pipe in the same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the lettering. On duct and 3" or larger piping, the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2" long and 1" wide. Smaller piping, 2-1/2" or less, shall have arrows with a shaft 1/2" wide and 2" long. Use a double-headed arrow if the flow can be in either direction. 5. Piping and duct shall be identified with the following colors: Medium in Banding Identifying Lettering Pipe or Duct Color Lettering Color Water: Glycol Chilled Water One Blue Glcyol Chilled Water CHWS Black Supply Supply Glycol Chilled Water Two Blue Glycol Chilled Water CHWR Black Return Return 2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION: A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face formica with white engraved lettering labels. B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face formica labels with white engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device. C. Numerically or alphabetically code all panel wiring and tubing. END OF SECTION 230553 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following: 1. Balancing water flow at each new chilled water system to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Adjust each new chiller to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of all new HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of all new HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate at each new piece of equipment. B. Balance: Set flow rate for each new chilled water system. C. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. D. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. E. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. F. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. G. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. H. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. I. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 2 J. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. K. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. L. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. M. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. N. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 90 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 120 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by- step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. C. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. D. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms. E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB. Balancing may only be performed by the following: 1. Barnett, Inc., Payson Utah B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 3 C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" or from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and/or other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.8 WARRANTY (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 4 B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. C. Examine chilled water systems and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. E. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. F. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare the system readiness reports found in section 3.23. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC or NEBB national standards and this Section. B. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including valve indicators and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports relating to new chilled water pumps. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 5 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow. 5. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 6. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 7. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.5 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive- displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pumps with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower’s. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the systems based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on each pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presetting’s. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure- drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 6 F. Measure pump flow rates and make final measurements of pump amperages, voltages, rpms, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature. G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. 3.6 MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. C. Report any starter thermal-protection sizing issues in the TAB issues log. 3.7 CHILLERS: A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of design flow with all pumps operating. Do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions: 1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by the chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW. 5. The kW input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan data, including number of fans and entering and leaving-air temperatures. 3.8 TEMPERATURE TESTING A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 7 B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.9 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as valve operators. F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note device positions and correlate with water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply. J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -5% 3.11 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 8 B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare weekly reports (hand-written is acceptable) to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a copy of the “TAB Issues and Issue Resolution” log of any deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. 3.12 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. C. Include the National Project Performance Guarantee issued by AABC or NEBB. D. Include a detailed narrative describing any discrepancies between the design requirements and the “as balanced” conditions that exceed the allowable tolerances described in 3.19 above. Also, list the steps taken and test preformed (with supporting data) attempting to rectify the condition. E. Include the final “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log. F. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. G. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Contractor's name and address. 7. Report date. 8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 9. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 9 12. Test conditions for pump performance forms, including the following: a. VFD settings for variable-flow pumping systems. b. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. H. Equipment Test Reports: For all equipment tested: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm where appropriate. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: (all elements of the system that were tested, including air and water flows, static pressures, pump head, inlet and outlet static pressures, inlet, outlet pressure type of coils, rows, circuits face areas, inlet, outlet wet bulb, dry bulb temperatures, duct sizes tested, inlet and outlet flows temperatures and pressures and all other pertinent data. The report to be organized per each item tested.) a. Total rate in gpm. b. Feet of head. c. Motor amps, volts, kW d. VFD setpoints e. Starter and Thermal Overload information f. Pump suction, discharge, differential pressure, dead-head, and total flow. I. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 10 3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 120 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. C. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. D. The TAB Final Report Verification shall be conducted by the CxA (and possibly other members of the Cx Team) and will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB’s field readings. E. The Test and Balance contractor will provide technicians and instrumentation to support the field verification. F. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used for the original TAB work. G. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as: 1. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the reported value. 2. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in background noise must be considered). H. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall result in the rejection of the final TAB report and require re-balancing of the system(s) in question. END OF SECTION 230593 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 1 SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Division 23, Section 23 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements applies to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules as required by the current International Energy Code, and by requirements of this section. Use no asbestos in this work. Include restorations of insulations of damaged work including repair of damaged existing insulation due to new work. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping Systems Insulation: a. Fiberglass. b. Flexible Unicellular 2. Equipment Insulation: a. Fiberglass. b. Cellular. c. Flexible Unicellular. C. Refer to Division 23 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields. D. Refer to Division 23 section "Ductwork" for duct linings. E. Refer to Division 23 section "System Identification" for installation of identification devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 2 C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation materials of one of the following (except as noted): 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div. 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. 5. Manville Products Corp. 6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 9. Thermacell 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: A. PREFORMED FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 547. (Class 1 for use to 450oF (230oC); Class 2 for use to 650oF (345oC); Class 3 for use to 1200oF (650oC). B. CELLULAR GLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 552. (Type I - flat block; Type II - pipe and tubing insulation, Class 1 - regular (uncovered), Class 2 - jacketed; Type III - special shapes; Type IV roof board. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 3 C. JACKETS FOR PIPING INSULATION: All purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option. D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Encase exterior fittings insulation and piping with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. F. Encase suction diffusers in a removable/replaceable insulating box. G. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. H. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. I. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; complying with the following table. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2” to 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga. 2” to 6” 6” 20 ga. 8” to 10 9” 16 ga 12” to 18” 12” 16 ga. J. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degrees insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of one of the following: a. Elcen Metal Products Co. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2 to 400oF, Class 3 to 850oF, Class 4 to 1000oF. (Class 1 - 400oF (204oC); Class 2 - 400oF (240oC); Class 3 - 850oF (454oC); Class 4 - 1000oF (538oC); Class 5 - 1800oF (982oC); Class 1 - 10 lbs/ft3; Class 2, 3 and 4 - 12 lbs/ft3; Class 5 - 20 lbs/ft3.) B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, B-4. (Type 1 - resilient flexible; Class B-1 - 0.65 lbs/ft3; Class B-2 - 0.75 lbs/ft3; Class B-3 - 01.0 lbs/ft3; Class B- 4 - 1.5 lbs/ft3; Class B-5 - 2.0 lbs/ft3; Class B-6 - 3.0 lbs/ft3; Type II - flexible; Class F-1 - 4.5 lbs/ft3; Type III - semirigid; Class f-2 - 4.5 lbs/ft3.) 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 4 C. Flexible Unicellular Sheet Insulation: ASTM C 534. (Type I - tubular; Type II - sheet. For use between -40oF (-40oC) and 200oF (93oC) only.) D. Jackets Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing material, not less than 8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, except as otherwise indicated. E. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. F. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.4 PIPING SEALANT THROUGH WALLS: See also Section Mechanical Firestopping. A. Sealant shall be a two-part foamed silicone elastomer equal to Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV foam or equivalent by 3M or “Spec Seal” by STI. Sealant shall be applied at any piping of pipe or duct penetration through fire or smoke walls to prevent air from passing through the opening. B. Sealant cell structure, foamed in place, shall be U.L. classified and shall meet the smoke development and fuel contribution ratings specified. Sealant shall be stable at extreme temperatures, and shall effectively confine such hazards as fire, smoke and gases. C. Sealant required at any fire/smoke wall penetration to be according to approved detail for each specific wall assembly. Contractor shall submit detail for engineer approval. 2.5 PIPE JACKETING: A. Provide and install jacketing for all new and contractor damaged insulation for pipe exposed in mechanical rooms, fan rooms and piping located outdoor. This in addition to standard foil on Kraft jacketing (ASJ). PVC jacketing is not allowed on outdoor piping systems. 1. Glycol Chilled Water, Makeup Water Piping (located outdoors.) Embossed aluminum - 0.024 thickness. Preformed aluminum fitting covers. Banded, lockseam joints, pop-rivet seals. 2. Chilled water, other insulated piping. PVC sheets, 0.030" thickness. PVC formed fitting covers. Solvent welded joints and seams. (Provide for removal and expansion.) B. Color of jacketing selected by Owner. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 5 2.6 COATING OF CHILLED WATER PIPING: After fabrication assembly and installation of blacksteel chilled water piping (copper galvanized steel and plastic piping excluded), scrape and brush piping free of scale, dirt and loose material, and wipe clean with solvent moistened cloth. A. Using brush or roller coat entire piping surfaces with prime and finish coats of a water based vinyl acrylic system equivalent to the RustOleum “RustOCrylic” 5700 system or equivalent by SherwinWilliams. System includes red primer (5769) grey primer (5781) and black finish coat (5779). Seek a final film thickness in the 4-6 mil range. B. Allow coating to dry and harden thoroughly before applying insulations. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass one-piece preformed pipe insulation, class related to temperature, with all purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, additional jacketing as noted. B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and covered with Zeston covers. C. All chilled water or any other lines upon which condensate moisture could form, shall have a vapor-proof jacket. D. Fire and smoke hazard for a complete insulation system shall not exceed: 1. Flame spread - 25 2. Fuel contribution - 50 3. Smoke development - 50 E. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. 3.2 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.3 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space; on condensate piping between steam trap and union; and on unions, flanges strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 6 B. Cold Piping 40OF (4.4OC) to Ambient: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: a. HVAC make-up water piping. b. All HVAC chilled water piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". C. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing. Use only impermeable insulations (foam glass). Cover with aluminum jacketing 0.02" minimum thickness. 3.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING (INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR): A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following HVAC piping systems. 1. Refrigerant piping, interior and exterior. B. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation. 1. Closed cell elastemetric preformed insulation - 3/4” thick. Amrstong, Rubatex C. Protect outdoor refrigerant piping insulation with a field applied UV resisting coating compatible with insulation. Cover with aluminum jacketing 0.2” minimum thickness. D. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing outdoor protective finish or jacketing. Use only impermeable insulations (foam glass). Cover with aluminum jacketing 0.02" minimum thickness. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment: 2. Factory insulated surfaces do not need to be field insulated. 3. Chilled water pump suction diffuser. B. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 7 1. Fiberglass: 2" thick for surfaces above 35oF (2oC) and 3" thick for surfaces 35oF (2oC) and lower. 2. Cellular Glass: 3" thick for surfaces above 35oF (2oC) and 4-1/2" thick for surfaces 35oF (2oC) and lower. 3. Flexible Unicellular: 1" thick for cold and chilled surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Provide neatly beveled edge at all terminations and interruptions of insulation. I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. J. Saddles and Shields: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide protection saddles or thermal hanger shields with protection shields under all piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and thermal shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 8 2. Protection Saddles: See section Supports and Anchors for saddle. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/4" and smaller. Use with thermal hanger shields for pipes 1-1/2" and larger. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2” TO 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga. 2” to 6” 6” 20 ga. 8” to 10” 9” 16 ga. 12” to 18” 12” 16 ga. 4. Thermal Hanger Shields: High density calcium silicate encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/2" to 8". 3.7 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. D. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately. E. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities. F. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable. G. Do not insulate over handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. H. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically for maintenance: including metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 9 3.8 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR: A. Repair damaged sections of mechanical insulation damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing. 3.9 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during construction period to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 230700 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 1 SECTION 230900 - MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of these control related sections. 1. See following sections for types of Control Systems included as a part of this section. a. Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Control Systems b. Section 23 09 33 - Electric Control Systems c. Control sequences are specified in this section under: "Sequence of Operation". B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed control devices. a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections: 1. Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 2. 120 volt service required by control systems. E. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric control equipment, of type and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. The Central Energy Facility and the Kimball Building projects shall be bid as an extension to the existing Johnson Controls Systems currently in operation. The Taylor Building project shall be bid as an extension to the existing Yamas Controls System currently in operation. Contractor shall make all upgrades as may be necessary to accommodate the required system expansion. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 2 B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. Installing by Johnson or Yamas Controls depending on the existing system in place. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing, design, and programming of specified and required control components, materials and systems. Approved contractor Johnson or Yamas Controls depending on the existing system in place. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following information: 1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing chillers, dry coolers, pumps, valves and control devices, etc. 2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 3. Indicate all required pneumatic tubing and/or electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of work that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Note contract responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely interface with and show existing installation in the existing building. 4. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct function of proposed sequences. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Section 230100. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. 4. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 3 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 0000) A. Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner, leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the systems. B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique. C. Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference. Submit to Architect along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow individual time for each trade and each system. D. Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified contractor personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed. 1.8 WARRANTIES: A. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion). B. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.9 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment. 1.10 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: A. During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building systems, have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control point. B. At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation, and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the Owner's operating personnel on each air system. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical Contractor. 1. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty period. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: Furnish stamped steel with hinged door and locking latch control cabinets to protect and conceal all control devices. Arrange components neatly to provide adequate maintenance opportunity and proper device function. Label all components, numerically code all piping and wiring. Terminate all wiring at terminal blocks. Provide engraved plastic labels for all panel face devices. A. Provide with surge suppressor - one per panel. B. Provide with 120/60/1 outlet - one per panel. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 4 C. Provide with fuse - quantity as required. D. Provide with transformer, 120/24 VAC, quantity as required. E. Provide RS-232 service trunk from main panel into each ATC panel for "Laptop" computer access. 2.2 CONTROL VALVE: A. Furnish automatic control valve required by the project. Design valve to pass the quantities of fluid at the pressure drop scheduled on the drawings. B. Mount control valve with stem in the up-vertical position. Valve shall have stainless steel trim, renewable seats. C. Furnish valve operator with adequate capacity to operate the valve smoothly through the operating range. Provide oversized motor or operator if needed. Voltage range shall be adjustable. PART III - CONTROL SEQUENCES 3.1 GENERAL: A. The intent is to reconnect existing control circuits to new replaced components. Provide and install any new components to create fully functioning systems to meet the following sequences. B. Provide control systems to manage and manipulate mechanical equipment in a functional and energy conserving way. C. Wire from existing control panels in the central mechanical rooms, with terminal block connections for interface to VFD’s, sensors, etc. 3.2 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM: A. Existing Central Control Units provide for overall control and monitoring of the Building Systems. 3.5 CHILLED WATER/COOL THERMAL STORAGE SYSTEM SEQUENCE: TBCH-1, (E) TBIB-1 thru 8, TBCHWP 1 & 2 (Applicable for the Taylor Building.) (Verify that the modified system functions per the following sequence with the new components in place.) A. General: The Thermal Ice Storage System shall operate to minimize electrical demand or shift usage to a lower electrical rate period. This system shall operate from a time of day schedule established by the owner to most economically operate the chiller to reduce demand charges. The Thermal Storage System shall operate in each of the following modes: 1. Ice Only (Discharge Cycle) (Chiller set point 43°F adjustable) 2. Chiller and Ice (Chiller set point 43°F adjustable) 3. Freeze (Charge Cycle) ( Chiller setpoint 27°F adjustable) 4. Freeze with coincident cooling (Chiller setpoint 27°F adjustable) 5. Chiller only (Chiller setpoint 42°F adjustable) 6. Off 7. Control occurs through combination of unit chiller controls, ice bank sensors and through the DDC control system. Chiller set point shall be changed from 45°F to 27°F through the DDC control system to match the mode above. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 5 B. Ice Only (Discharge): During periods of high electrical demand, on-peak demand, or when desired by the owner the ice storage will discharge to provide the cooling needs of the building. 1. TBCHWP Pump Control: a. TBCHWP-2 pump will start on call for cooling from any fan system through its VFD. If the pump doesn't start as sensed by differential pressure, an alarm TBCHWP-2 Pump Fail will be generated. The speed of the pump varies through its VFD, based on a signal from the existing chilled water differential pressure sensor (located in the fan room) through the DDC system. b. TBCHWP-1 pump will also start though it’s VFD. The speed of TBCHWP-1 is manually set at the time of balance. c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall modulate to allow flow to circulate through the ice banks as necessary to maintain a 43 degree (adjustable) supply temperature. d. The existing ice storage banks chilled water mixing control valve shifts to allow water to pass through ice storage banks. C. Chiller and Ice: When a time occurs that the existing ice bank cooling source lacks sufficient capacity to meet the building load, simultaneous chiller and ice storage discharge shall provide the necessary cooling. 1. TBCHWP Pump Control: a. TBCHWP-2 pump will start on call for cooling from any fan system through its VFD. If the pump doesn't start as sensed by differential pressure, an alarm TBCHWP-2 Pump Fail will be generated. The speed of the pump varies through its VFD, based on a signal from the existing chilled water differential pressure sensor (located in the fan room) through the DDC system. b. TBCHWP-1 pump will also start though it’s VFD. The speed of TBCHWP-1 is manually set at the time of balance. c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall modulate to allow flow to circulate through the ice banks as necessary to maintain a 43 degree (adjustable) supply temperature. d. The existing ice storage banks chilled water mixing control valve shifts to allow water to pass through ice storage banks. 2. Chiller Mode TBC-1: a. Chiller shall be placed in Ready Mode by a signal from the DDC control system. b. Chiller shall operate off of its internal controls. Chiller shall not start if flow is not proven. If Chiller does not start, an alarm Chiller Fail will be generated. c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall continue to modulate to maintain a 45 degree (adjustable) supply temperature. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 6 D. Freeze: When no building loads are present and when the electrical demand charges are low, the chiller shall be dedicated to freezing (charging) the existing ice storage banks. 1. TBCHWP Pump Control: a. Upon signal from the DDC control system, the thermal storage system shall be placed in the freeze (charge) mode. TBCHWP-1 will start through it VFD. The speed of CHWP-1 is manually set at the time of balance. If there is no proof of flow within 30 seconds (adjustable) an alarm CHWP-1 Pump Fail will be generated. b. The existing ice storage banks chilled water mixing control valve shifts to allow water to pass through ice storage banks. 2. Chiller Mode: TBC-1 a. Chiller shall be placed in Ready Mode by a signal from the DDC control system. b. Chiller shall operate off of its internal controls. Chiller shall not start if flow is not proven. If Chiller does not start, an alarm Chiller Fail will be generated. c. When the fluid entering the chiller reaches 27 degrees (adjustable) the chiller shall turn off and TBCHWP-1 pump will stop. E. Freeze with Coincident Cooling: This mode shall operate if the system design requires freezing of the ice storage tanks to begin while incidental cooling loads still exists. 1. Control shall be as identified for the "Freeze" operating mode as above. 2. TBCHWP Pump Control: a. TBCHWP-2 pump will start on call for cooling from any fan system through its VFD. If the pump doesn't start as sensed by differential pressure, an alarm TBCHWP-2 Pump Fail will be generated. The speed of the pump varies through its VFD, based on a signal from the existing chilled water differential pressure sensor (located in the fan room) through the DDC system. b. TBCHWP-1 pump will also start though it’s VFD. The speed of TBCHWP-1 is manually set at the time of balance. c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall modulate to allow flow to circulate through the CHWP-1, chiller, and ice bank piping path as necessary to maintain a 45 degree (adjustable) supply temperature. F. Chiller Only: When there is no ice available the chiller will need to operate. 1. TBCHWP Pump Control: a. TBCHWP-2 pump will start on call for cooling from any fan system through its VFD. If the pump doesn't start as sensed by differential pressure, an alarm TBCHWP-2 Pump Fail will be generated. The speed of the pump varies through its VFD, based on a signal from the existing chilled water differential pressure sensor (located in the fan room) through the DDC system. b. TBCHWP-1 pump will also start though it’s VFD. The speed of TBCHWP-1 is manually set at the time of balance. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 7 c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall modulate as necessary to maintain a 45 degree (adjustable) supply temperature to the building. 2. Chiller Mode TBC-1: a. Chiller shall be placed in Ready Mode by a signal from the DDC control system. b. Chiller shall operate off of its internal controls. Chiller shall not start if flow is not proven. If Chiller does not start, an alarm Chiller Fail will be generated. c. The existing building chilled water supply mixing valve shall modulate to maintain a 45 degree (adjustable) supply temperature as noted above. d. The existing ice storage banks chilled water mixing control valve shifts to allow water to bypass the ice storage and pass through the chiller. G. Off: When the tanks are completely charged and no cooling load exists, or by signal from the DDC control system, all equipment shall be secured and turned off. 3.3 AIR COOLED CHILLER CONTROL SEQUENCE – CEFC-4. (Applicable for the Central Energy Facility.) (Verify that the modified system functions per the following sequence with the new components in place.) A. Operate the air cooled chiller during early spring and late fall and possibly during peak loads in the summer time after the existing water cooled chillers are operating at full capacity. B. When the air cooled chiller is enabled to run through the DDC system, the control system shall first verify that the related existing glycol chilled water pump and chilled water pumps serving the glycol heat exchanger are running. The existing system chilled water pump shall then operate at speed as required through its VFD to maintain the system differential set point. C. The DDC system shall also reset the CHWS temperature set point coming off of the air cooled chiller. On shutdown, turn off the air cooled chiller first allowing both the chilled water and glycol chilled water pumps to run for 3-5 minutes to clear the evaporator of active refrigerant. 3.4 DRY COOLER / AIR COOLED CHILLER CONTROL SEQUENCE – KBDC-1 / KBC-1. (Applicable for the Kimball Building Data Center.) (Verify that the modified system functions per the following sequence with the new components in place.) A. There are two glycol chilled water pumps provided with the air cooled chiller. They run continuously in a lead / lag manner with one pump providing backup for the other. B. On call for cooling by any of the existing indoor cooling units serving the Data Center, the three way mixing valve shall first open through the DDC system in order to allow flow through the Dry Cooler. C. When the Dry Cooler can no longer satisfy the cooling demand, the air cooled chiller shall be enabled to operate through the DDC system at its stages of cooling when flow is proven in order to satisfy the cooling demand. D. When the outside air temperature rises above 60°F (adj.) or the temperature of the GCHWR line, the three way mixing valve shall close to the Dry Cooler and the Dry Cooler shall be disabled. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 8 E. With the Dry Cooler operating, if the GCHWS drops below set point of 46°F (adj.) the three way mixing valve shall modulate closed to the Dry Cooler allowing an increasing volume of GHWR to mix with GHWS to maintain the set point temperature. F. The DDC system also monitors fluid temperatures where indicated and monitors the Air Cooled chiller status. 3.5 MODIFIED GLYCOL MAKEUP UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCE. (Applicable for the Kimball Building Data Center.) A. The DDC system monitors the pressure switches serving four different glycol chilled water systems in this building. B. When any of the four pressure switches alarms, indicating low pressure for that system, the DDC system shall open the solenoid valve related to that system and send a signal to the existing glycol makeup unit to enable the glycol feed pump to operate in order to satisfy the respective system pressure. END OF SECTION 230900 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923-1 SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) PART I - GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete the temperature control work for the entire project. A. For the Central Energy Facility and the Kimball Building, an existing Johnson Metasys Building Automation System is in place. B. For the Taylor Building an existing Yamas Building Automation System is in place. C. The Contractor under this heading shall connect the controls for the new Mechanical Equipment and related Equipment VFD’s including sensors, switches, relays, into the existing local Application Specific Controllers. D. Local Application Specific Controllers (ASC) and Network Control Unit (NCU). E. Adjustment and validation of existing control system. Instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of control equipment. F. Composite electric diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under this and other sections. G. This system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as hereinafter specified. 1. Air Cooled Chillers 2. Chilled Water Pumps 3. Dry Coolers 4. Other Systems 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900. A. All new control components shall be compatible with the respective existing building automation systems in place. B. This specification wording is based on Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys System product line. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 230900. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900. 1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900. 1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900. 1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900. 1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923-2 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: See Section 230900. A. Panel mount all additional controllers and devices other than remote sensors and operators. Provide permanent labels, terminal blocks, etc. 2.2 CONTROL SOURCES: A. POWER SUPPLY: 1. Existing in place. B. COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS: 1. Existing in place. C. CONTROL WIRING: 1. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls. 2. In all other building areas, ie., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be square with the walls of the buildings. 3. Number and code all wiring. 2.3 DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (DDC): A. OVERVIEW: Reconnect controls for new Mechanical Equipment into existing controllers as indicated on the drawings. 1. All new safety devices, shall be hard wired to accomplish their critical functions completely independent of the DDC and shall have additional outputs as required to service as inputs to the DDC for secondary control and reporting functions. 2.4 RELAY KIT (RLY): A relay kit with manual override switch shall be furnished and installed on all new digital outputs signals for start/stop of the chillers, dry cooler and chilled water pumps. The relay kits shall be installed for ease of maintenance and manual overriding of binary output points. Each relay kit shall have the following built-in features: A. Auto/Manual Switch to Enable/Disable Local Control B. Separate On/Off Buttons for Override Control C. Local Relay Kit Monitoring Contact to advise the operator at the NCU or Operator's Workstation if any of the Auto/Manual Switches have been placed in the Manual Override Position. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923-3 D. Override switches shall be able to operate the motor loads or starter coils whether the controller is powered or de-energized. 2.5 INPUT ANALOG PRESSURE (IAP): When required to interface pneumatic inputs to an ASC or NCU, and IAP shall be installed to convert the pneumatic pressure to a voltage output. 2.6 SENSORS: A. Furnish and install electronic immersion temperature transmitters of the linear precision resistance element of resistance averaging element. Their range shall be -55°F to 250°F with an accuracy of plus or minus .25°F. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy. B. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (PTC) nickel wire, or silicon type with a high resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors shall be available for room, duct or wall mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to properly suit the application. 1. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series (temperature sensor only), Johnson Controls Inc. . 2.7 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD): The VFD's shall be furnished and installed as specified. A. The DDC controller shall furnish required 4-20ma control signal to modulate the VFD. PART III – EXECUTION 3.1 COMPLETE SYSTEM: A. Integrate into all controls into the existing control system in place. Provide all controls and related functions, with all power and communications wiring, with sensors, actuators, valves, etc. to place the cooling systems in full operation. B. Participate in the checkout and commissioning and shake out of all of the mechanical systems. Provide complete and detailed checkout and testing of all controls and control sequences. Provide thermal rise trend recording and logs during system testing and shake out, which includes, but is not necessarily limited to thermal trend for; sequence during simulated chiller failure and operation sequence before thermal load and with thermal load. C. Contractor shall coordinate with BYU Idaho personnel to get Ethernet jacks installed. For communication from front-end server to the jack panels in the field. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923-4 3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES: A. The sequences of control for the DDC system shall be equivalent to those specified for the base bid system with the added benefits of programmable algorithmic control. B. Fully describe the sequences in the submittals. C. Fully document all work by shop drawing and product bulletin submittal, work from reviewed drawings, maintain record documents during installation and provide a complete "As-Built" document set in Autocad 2005 at completion. 3.3 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. GENERAL: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B. FIELD EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURES: DDC controls panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test. Such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operations verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displaying value. 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. C. WORKSTATION TEST PROCEDURES: The system workstation test procedures shall be as follows: 1. Communication with each DDC control panel shall be demonstrated. 2. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated. 3. Control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation. 4. All available system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system workstation. 5. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated. 6. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923-5 D. AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "6" complete 11x17 as-built drawing sets, together with AutoCad diskettes to the Owner. E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system. 6. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the DDC system. 7. Flow charts of the custom software programs utilized in the DDC system as approved. 8. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 9. A copy of the warranty. 10. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 11. Recommended spare parts list. END OF SECTION 230923 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 1 SECTION 232000 - GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 232113 General Pipes and Fittings section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. C. Division 230000 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several other sections of this specification. B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Steel Piping 2. Copper Piping 3. Grooved Joint Piping 4. Pressure Rated Polypropylene Piping 5. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products. C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor. 4. All workmen employed on the project to carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. C. Welding Certification: 1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months prior to working on the project. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 2 2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313. 3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at the job site in the positions required (flat, verticle, overhead etc). 4. Submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on the project until so certified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system. B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical fitting. Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes And Standards: 1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. 2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work. 3. NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes and pipe fittings bearing approval label by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 4. Polypropylene Pipe and Fittings: a. ASTM F 2389-07 Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems b. CSA B137.11 Polypropylene (PP-R) Pipe and Fittings for Pressure Applications c. NSF/ANSI 14 Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 3 B. Store pipe in a manner to prevent dirt and debris from entering piping. When possible store steel and copper pipes and tubing inside and protected from weather. Whether stored inside or outside elevate above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. Raise slightly one end of sealed piping to prevent accumulations of condensate and pitting where condensate accumulates. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. Use United States (domestic) manufactured pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe. B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Use domestic manufactured fittings only. Do not use foreign manufactured fittings. 2.2 STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS: A. Black Steele Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A53. B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691. F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting. G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4. H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. I. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300 lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated. J. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250oF. Equal to Clear Flow Dielectric Waterway Fittings. Install per manufacturers requirements. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 4 K. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. L. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Material Group: Group 1.1. 2. End Connections: Buttwelding. 3. Facings: Raised-face. 4. Steel Pipe Flanges For Waterworks Service: AWWA C207. M. Forged-Steel and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe. N. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. O. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close- nipples). 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. Do not use Type M piping. B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280. D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24. J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 2.4 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: (Only where acceptable.) A. General: At Installer's option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230oF (110oC), excluding steam piping, condensing water return to pump, and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, flanged, or threaded methods, and 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 5 may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, expansion joints, expansion compensators, or vibration reducers. B. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (Victaulic style 77) For rigid joints (Victaulic "Zero Flex" style 07). 1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. 2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. 3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized. C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. 1. Water Services: EPDM Grade E, with green color code identification. 2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer. D. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. 1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts. E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. 3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B for 2" to 20". 4. Steel: ASTM A 234. G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. H. Specialties: 1. Dielectric couplings. Victaulic Style 47. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 6 I. Grooves: Conform to the following: 1. Standard Steel: Roll grooved. 2. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606. J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of one of the following: 1. ITT Grinnell Corp. 2. Victaulic Co. of America. 3. Gustin-Bacon 4. Anvil Gruvlok K. Coordination with Section 23 07 00: Insulation of coupled piping is more difficult and expensive than is that of welded piping related to couplings, coupling ears, and more involved support. Where coupled piping is used, include all extra cost in the proposal. Install such at no additional cost to the owner. 2.5 PRESSURE RATED POLYPROPYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Pipe shall be manufactured from a PP-R or PP-RCT resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. The pipe shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer’s own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All pipe shall be made in a three layer extrusion process. All pipe shall comply with the rated pressure requirements of ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137.11. All pipe shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F2389 or CSA B137.11. B. Pipe shall be Aquatherm® Climatherm® available from Aquatherm, Inc. or Peston North America. C. Fittings shall be manufactured from PP-R or PP-RCT resin meeting the short-term properties and long-term strength requirements of ASTM F 2389. The fittings shall contain no rework or recycled materials except that generated in the manufacturer’s own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. All fittings shall be certified by NSF International as complying with NSF 14, and ASTM F 2389 or CSA B137. D. Fittings shall be Aquatherm® Climatherm® available from Aquatherm, Inc. or Peston North E. Where pipe will be exposed to direct UV light, it shall be insulated and jacketed. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS: A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 7 B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing solders in domestic water applications. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. 2. Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS. C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping connectors of the following: a. Fernco, Inc. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently- leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible union, flanges, etc., for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance with codes. 1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. Provide high point vents, low point drains with valves and extension to drain for all piping. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 8 C. All piping in mechanical rooms, etc., shall be exposed. Do not conceal or imbed piping in walls, floors or other structures. D. Make changes in direction or size with manufactured fittings. Anchor and support piping for free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building. E. Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways clear. F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate maintenance. G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc. H. On horizontal straight runs of pipe, use eccentric reducers with straight side on top for water piping. I. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping in or through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures or above electrical gear unless authorized and directed. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31. D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. E. Welded: 1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0oF (-18oC) where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF. b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 9 c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20". d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions. e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements. f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. g. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe of size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. G. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING: A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Flushing shall consist of not less than six (6) short intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for cleanliness. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. B. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601. C. Clean, flush as above and treat cooling systems in accordance with Sections chemical treatment. Certify by signature of Contractor and Owner's Representative. 3.4 PIPING TESTS: A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Required test period is 2 hours. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 232000 - 10 2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or pressure rating. 3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure. 4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Notifications: At least 10 days prior to commencement of required testing, notice shall be submitted for review. Tests shall be made prior to painting insulating or covering of any joints and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping. C. Inspections: Contractor to visually inspect piping while under hydrostatic pressure. Copies of inspection shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not hydrostatically tested may be x-ray tested. D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31. G. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent requirements. END OF SECTION 232113 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 1 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Mechanical Requirements” are a part of the work described in this section. B. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings” are a part of the work described in this section. C. Other Specification sections related to Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing. 1.2 SUMMARY: Work shown on the drawings and required by these specifications including incidental work classified as "best practices of the trade". A. Glycol chilled water systems. B. Other work as indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hydronic piping products and equipment of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least 3 years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature indicating source, brand, type, model, performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc. B. Record Drawings: See Division 23. C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment including a comprehensive system operating description. See Section 019113. D. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: Participate in specified instruction. See Division 23. 1. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion). 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 2 2. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices. 1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations 2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels 3. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Codes 4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code / International Plumbing Code 5. ASHRAE Handbooks PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS – GLYCOL CHILLED WATER: 2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS: A. Schedule 40 black steel, A-53 with malleable steel threaded fittings up to 2" size and forged steel welding fittings 2-1/2" and larger. Contractor option to use a grooved joint system accommodating for additional support and insulation work. Grooved joint system shall only be used in exposed areas such as mechanical rooms and fan rooms. All piping in shafts and above ceilings shall be either screwed, flanged, or welded. 1. Rigid type “K” or “L” copper, bronze or dielectric interface. B. Pressure rated polypropylene, refer to General pipes and Fittings, Section 232000 for specifications. 1. Use on Kimball Building Data Center chilled water pipes to match existing. 2. Provide fittings, flanges, etc. to adapt to equipment, valves and miscellaneous connections. C. Drains And Overflow: Install piping of any size from drains and overflows using type K or L copper piping with Solder joint type wrought copper of wrought bronze fittings. Drains and over flows shall be terminated over floor drains or drain funnels adjacent to equipment. Furnish drains from all pump bases to floor drains. D. Water Connections: Provide piping and fittings connecting to the domestic water system, such as fill lines, makeup water lines, etc., of Type K or L copper tubing with solder joint type wrought copper or wrought bronze fittings. Copper piping shall be connected to equipment and steel piping with insulated unions to prevent electrolysis. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: See Section "Valves". 2.3 VENT VALVES: A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually. Use ball valve. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 3 B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, 1/2" NPS inlet and outlet connections. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering vent valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 4. Spirax Sarco. 5. Amtrol. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials and products are to be installed. 3.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Arrange system in a neat, orderly and functional manner. Maintain access around all equipment. Provide sheeves for all structural penetrations. B. Plan ahead for seismic restraint and vibration isolation. C. Verify adequate ventilation for heat producing equipment, watch out for possible freezing conditions. D. Air Vents and Line Drains: Provide air vents at all high points of piping systems with vent line extended to valve installed in accessible location 5'-0" above the floor, vent line extended to drain. Provide drain valves at all equipment and at low points in the system, extend drain lines to drain funnel or floor sink. E. Provide pressure gauges and thermometers and pressure/temperature plugs as indicated on the flow diagrams, piping plans and equipment details. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING: A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings." B. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush. C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 4 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 23 "Hydronic Piping and Specialties." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 23 "Mechanical Supporting Devices." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: A. Install valves in accordance with Division 23 "Valves." B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Hydronic Terminal Outlet Valves: Install on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. E. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system. F. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION COMPENSATION PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide for expansion and contraction of all piping systems with anchors, guides, loops, expansion joints, grooved joints, etc. Provide one expansion loop for every 100 feet of pipe or fraction thereof. 3.8 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. General: Connect hydronic piping systems to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal shut-off valve and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing valves behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic temperature control valve with unions on supply line. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES: A. Balance Valves: At locations shown on drawings. B. Vent Valves: 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 232113 - 5 1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.10 TESTS: A. Isolate sections of piping and equipment and pressure test to 175 psi or 1-1/2 times the maximum potential pressure of the system, but not to exceed the test pressure rating of a system component. 1. Conduct an air pressure test, using a soap solution to check for leaks. Establish the pressure, close off the pressure source and let stand for 24 hours. Given constant temperature, there should be no drop in pressure. 2. After the air test, fill the system with water, raise to test pressure and inspect for leaks. Repair all leaks. Repeat tests. Report and certify all tests. B. Test other system components as needed to verify proper assembly and installation. C. Participate in overall system test and balance work. END OF SECTION 232115 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HVAC PUMPS 232123 - 1 SECTION 232123 - HVAC PUMPS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Motors, Drives and Electrical Requirements, General Piping and Fittings, Mechanical Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section, including incidental work classified as "Best practices of the trade". B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: 1. Base mounted, close coupled, horizontal end suction. C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control and seismic anchoring of HVAC pumps. D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general-use centrifugal pumps with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least 5 years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Idaho. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HVAC PUMPS 232123 - 2 4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. C. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices. 1. HI Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with HI "Hydraulic Institute Standards". 2. UL Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". 3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 4. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Code. 5. Uniform Building Code/International Mechanical Code. 6. ASHRAE Handbook(s). 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, indicating source, brand, type, model and performance characteristics, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump, control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23 AOperation and Maintenance Manuals.@ 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HVAC PUMPS 232123 - 3 1.6 WARRANTY: The Warranty period shall be a non-prorated period of 12 months from date of installation, not to exceed 18 months from date of manufacture. Warranty shall cover against defective material and/or faulty workmanship. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUMPS: A. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.2 CIRCULATING PUMPS, GLYCOL CHILLED WATER: (Base mounted, close coupled) A. General: Furnish and install each pump complete with a spool piece and suction diffuser. See drawings for capacity and configuration. B. Equipment: 1. Horizontal, End Suction Pump Product (Close Coupled) a. Type: Horizontal shaft, end suction, single stage, for 175 psig maximum working pressure. b. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, open type lubricable ball bearings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. c. Impeller: Stainless Steel, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. d. Bearings: Open type grease lubricated ball bearings with zerk grease fittings. e. Shaft: High strength carbon steel. f. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. Furnish spare mechanical seal. g. Drive: Close coupled. h. Baseplate: Fabricated steel with integral drain rim. i. Motor: T-frame, drip-proof motor with lubricable ball bearings, zerk grease fittings, relief plugs, 1750 rpm. Premium Efficiency. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HVAC PUMPS 232123 - 4 j. Provide each pump with a spool piece and suction diffuser to provide a smooth flow of water into the pump inlet, complete with strainer, adjustable support leg, and start-up strainer. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pumps of one of the following: 1. Grundfos pumps 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS: A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Support: Refer to Division 23 "Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control" for support and mounting requirements of HVAC pumps. D. Installation: 1. Mount each pump on a concrete pad. Grout the pump base with "Embeco" grout to insure a level and solid installation. 2. Install gauge sensing points as shown on detail. 3. Install spool piece between the suction diffuser and pump inlet to allow for sufficient room and insulation space. 4. Remove start-up strainer during final testing and balancing phase. 5. Check pump rotation. 6. Align pump during final test and balance phase. 7. Pipe drain to floor drain. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HVAC PUMPS 232123 - 5 E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. F. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 23 HVAC piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gages, supports, and flexible connections as indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Refer to Division 23 section "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing" for pump system balancing; not work of this section. D. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 232123 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1 SECTION 232500 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Types of chemical treatment specified in this section include the following: 1. Glycol Chilled Water System. 2. Cleaning and Treatment. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLYCOL SYSTEM: Provide and install glycol for each of the glycol chilled water systems complete with the following: A. Glycol: 1. 35% glycol by volume to makeup the lost glycol for each of the entire chilled water systems. Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union Carbide. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, SYSTEM CLEANING AND TREATMENT: A. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed to fill, vent and drain system. B. Flush and clean new and existing systems. C. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed to fill, vent and drain system. 1. Use a treatment schedule similar to the following, but to be verified compatible with system materials. 2. Fill, circulate, drain system, clean strainers. Use clean water. 3. Fill, introduce sodium triphosphate or suitable degreaser, take the water to operating temperature, circulate for minimum of 5 hours, drain, flush. 4. Fill the chilled water systems as noted below: a. Fill each chilled water system including existing piping with 35% inhibited propylene glycol, Dowfrost HD. 5. Maintain inhibited glycol concentrations in chilled water system for entire first year, replace if lost. END OF SECTION 232500 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 1 SECTION 236400 - AIR COOLED CHILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install air cooled water chillers as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties. 2. Division 260000 - a. Furnishing and installing power wiring, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and power wiring to starters. b. Furnishing and installing all interconnecting control wiring between chiller control panel, remote control items, including flow switches, and control wiring external to unit for the control system, and installation of control components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AHRI 550/590 - Standard for Water Chilling Packages using the Vapor Compression Cycle. B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. NSI/ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings. D. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code SEC VIII, Division 1. E. UL 1995 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. F. ANSI/AFBMA 9-1978 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for G. IASTM B117 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing H. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products I. ASTM A525 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Sheet Steel Products J. ASTM D1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens, Subjected to Corrosive Environments 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. A manufacturer of air cooled chillers with a minimum of five years experience in the production of these units. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 2 B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. A firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on projects with air cooled chillers similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Comply with ARI Standard 590-92 for testing and rating certification of reciprocating water chillers. Provide ARI certification label on all units. 2. Unit shall conform to UL 1995/CSA 22.2 #236 for construction of air cooled chiller and shall have UL/CSA label affixed to unit. 3. Conform to ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of reciprocating water chillers. 4. Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-1994 for construction and operation of water chillers. D. Acoustics: 1. The manufacturer of each air cooled chiller shall provide outdoor sound power level data across all major octave band center frequencies for cataloged operating range of each unit at gross cooling capacity range. Data shall be obtained in conformance with ANSI S1.32-1980, American National Standard Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Discrete Frequency and Narrow Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms and per AMCA Standard 300-85 test code "Sound Rating Air Moving Devices". E. Guarantees: 1. The system shall have a limited warranty for one full year from substantial completion. Provide 5-year extended parts warranty related to compressor. F. Maintenance Services 1. Furnish complete service and maintenance of each air cooled chiller for one year from Date of Substantial Completion by contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: 1. Submit overall dimension drawings, field-wiring diagrams, and product data including water flow, pressure drops, total power consumption, water entering and leaving conditions under all operating modes. 2. Basis of unit selection and performance with supporting documentation to be furnished with bid. Guaranteed maximum annual operating cost to be supplied with bid. B. Shop Drawings: 1. In tight areas, submit scaled layout drawings of proposed equipment installation. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 3 C. Record Drawings: 1. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed equipment, in accordance with requirements of Division 01 and Section 230000. D. Maintenance Data: 1. Electrical wiring diagrams, installation and maintenance instructions and an owner's manual shall be supplied with each unit. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handle unit carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Damaged units or damaged components shall not be installed. Replace all damaged parts with new parts from the manufacturer. B. If unit is to be stored prior to installation store in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading the unit and moving it to the final location. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide two year complete parts and labor warranty and three more years on the compressor, for a total of five years on the compressor all from date of initial start-up of system. 1.7 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Training 1. At completion of Project, Chiller Manufacturer’s factory representative shall provide one day of training to Owner. 2. Training will be scheduled by Owner with minimum of seven days notice to Chiller Manufacturer’s representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Materials and Valves - As specified in Division 23. 2.2 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS (Taylor Building, Central Energy Facility) A. Summary 1. The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled water chillers as shown as scheduled on the contract documents. The chillers shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled. 2. The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled rotary liquid chiller of size and capacity scheduled. Unit shall be installed in strict accordance with this 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 4 specification. All units shall be furnished complete with semi-hermetic helical rotary compressors, shell and tube evaporator, air-cooled condenser, electronic expansion valves and microprocessor control panel. Total unit shall be UL certified and include the UL label. The unit shall be designed for outdoor application. The unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 550/590. 3. Factory Functional Test: The chiller shall be pressure tested, evacuated and fully charged with R134a refrigerant and oil. In addition, a factory functional test shall be conducted to verify correct operation by cycling condenser fans and compressors and confirmation operation of temperature and pressure sensors. B. Compressors 1. Construct chiller using semi-hermetic, direct-drive, helical rotary screw compressors with independent circuits. 2. Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation. 3. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of a capacity control variable speed drive. The controls system logic must decelerate the compressor to minimum speed for a soft start. 4. Provide direct-drive compressor motor that is suction gas cooled with robust construction and system design protection. Compressor starter shall be a variable speed drive to provide a soft start. Compressor without variable speed drive shall be provided with a wye-delta or solid state starter for reduced inrush current upon starting. 5. Provide compressor heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to compressor during shut down. Energize heater when compressor is not operating. C. Evaporator 1. The evaporator shall be designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME code for a refrigerant side working pressure of 200 psig. Waterside working pressure shall be 150 psig. 2. Insulate the evaporator with a minimum of K=0.28 UV rated insulation. If the insulation is field installed, the additional money to cover material and installation costs in the field should be included in the bid. 3. Evaporator heaters shall be factory installed and shall protect unit down to -30 F. Contractor shall wire separate power to energize heat tape and protect cooler while chiller is disconnected from the main power. 4. Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless internally and externally finned copper tubes, roller expanded into tube sheets. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 5 5. Provide ability to remove evaporator tubes from either end of the heat exchanger. 6. Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors. 7. Water connections shall be grooved pipe. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one leaving connection. If manufacturer provides 2 separate evaporators, contractor shall provide manifold and pressure gauges to ensure equal flow is provided to each evaporator. 8. Proof of flow shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer, mechanically installed and electrically wired, at the factory of origin. D. Condensers and Fans 1. Low Sound Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct-drive, corrosion resistant, glass fiber reinforced composite molded into a low noise fan blade. 2. Chiller shall be able to start and operate in ambient conditions down to 32F and up to 105F. 3. Construct condenser coils of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to internally finned long life tube alloy. The condenser coils shall have an integral sub-cooling circuit and shall be designed for 525 psig or higher working pressure. 4. Provide factory installed louvered "architecturally pleasing" guard panels. Panel louvers shall cover condenser, evaporator and compressor sections so all are hidden from sight. Wire screens or wire mesh will not be allowed. E. Enclosure/Starter 1. House components in a galvanized steel frame and mounted on a formed steel base. Hot-dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) recognized as G90-U, UL guide number DTHW2. 2. Unit panels, base rails and control panels shall be finished with a baked on powder paint. Control panel doors shall have door stays. Paint system shall meet the requirements for outdoor equipment of Federal Government Agencies. 3. Mount starters and Terminal Blocks in a UL 1995 rated weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. If a circuit breaker is chosen, it should be a lockable, through-the-door type with an operating handle and clearly visible from outside of unit indicating if power is on or off. 4. Casings fabricated from steel that do not have a Zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123 or ASTM A525 shall be treated for the prevention of corrosion with a factory coating or paint system. The coating or paint system shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B 117. Each specimen 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 6 shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D 1654. Upon completion of exposure, the coating or paint system shall be evaluated and rated in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D 1654. The rating of failure at the scribe mark shall be not less than six (average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch). The rating of the inscribed area shall not be less than ten (no failure). Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry-film thickness. For each compressor provide a variable speed drive starter. Across-the-line and Delta-Delta shall be unacceptable. 5. A control power transformer shall be factory-installed and factory-wired to provide unit control power. F. Variable Speed Drive 1. The water chiller shall be furnished with a variable speed drive (VSD) to minimize maintenance and maximize cooling efficiency. The VSD shall be factory mounted on the chiller and shipped completely factory assembled, wired and tested. 2. The VSD will be specifically designed to interface with the water chiller controls and allow for the operating ranges and specific characteristics of the chiller. The VSD control logic shall optimize chiller efficiency by coordinating compressor motor speed to maintain the chilled water setpoint. 3. The VSD efficiency shall be 95% or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental displacement power factor shall be a minimum of 0.95. 4. The VSD shall be solid state, microprocessor based pulse-width modulated (PWM) design. The VSD shall be voltage and current regulated. Output power devices shall be IGBT transistors. 5. Power semi-conductor and capacitor cooling shall be from a liquid cooled heatsink. 6. The VSD shall have thin film capacitors. a. If thin film capacitors are not factory provided, then manufacturer should include a 5 year warranty on the drive. 7. The VSDs shall each be furnished in a UL 1995 rated metal enclosure having as minimum a short circuit withstand rating of 65,000 amps. It will include three phase input lugs plus a grounding lug for electrical connections, output motor connection via factory installed bus bars and all components properly segregated and completely enclosed in a single metal enclosure. a. Enclosure shall include a padlockable, door-mounted circuit breaker with shunt trip and AIC rating of 65,000 amps. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 7 b. The entire chiller package shall be UL/CUL listed. 8. The following VSD status indicators shall be available to facilitate startup and maintenance: a. Output speed in hertz and rpm b. Input line voltage c. Input line kW d. Output/load amps e. Average current in percent RLA f. Load power factor g. Fault h. VSD transistor temperature 9. The VSD shall include the following features: a. All control circuit voltages are physically and electrically isolated from power circuit voltage. b. Soft start, adjustable linear acceleration, coast-to-stop. c. Adjustable current limiting and UL approved electronic motor overload protection. d. Insensitivity to incoming power phase sequence. e. VSD and motor protection from the following faults: 1) Output line-to-line short circuit protection 2) Line-to-ground short circuit protection 3) Phase loss at AFD input 4) Phase reversal / Imbalance 5) Over-voltage / Under-voltage 6) Over temperature 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 8 10. Warranties a. The variable speed drive shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of twelve months from the date of installation. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs, and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory-authorized on-site service. G. Refrigerant Circuit 1. All units shall have 2 refrigeration circuits to provide redundancy, each with one compressor on each circuit. 2. Provide for refrigerant circuit: a. Liquid line shutoff valve. b. Suction service valve c. Filter (replaceable core type). d. Liquid line sight glass. e. Electronic expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure. f. Charging valve. g. Discharge and oil line check valves. h. High side pressure relief valve. i. Full operating charge of HFC-134a and oil. 3. Capacity Modulation: Provide capacity modulation by a variable speed drive. Unit shall be capable or operation down to 20%. H. Controls 1. Chilled water temperature control shall be microprocessor-based, proportional and integral controller to show water and refrigerant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and diagnostics. This microprocessor-based controller is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. Controls shall include the following readouts and diagnostics: a. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing and over/under voltage protection. b. Low chilled water temperature protection. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 9 c. High and low refrigerant pressure protection. d. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature. e. Condenser fan sequencing to automatically cycle fans in response to load, expansion valve pressure, condenser pressure, and differential pressure to optimize unit efficiency. f. Display diagnostics. g. Oil pressure control based off of maintaining system differential pressure. h. Compressors: Status (on/off), %RLA, anti-short cycle timer, and automatic compressor lead-lag. 2. On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control wiring, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformer and a single 115 volt 60 Hz single phase connection for evaporator freeze protection heaters. a. The unit controller shall utilize a microprocessor that will automatically take action to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with: evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condensing pressure and motor current overload. 3. In the above case, the chiller will continue to run in an unloaded state, and will continue to produce some chilled water in an attempt to meet the cooling load. However, if the chiller reaches the trip-out limits, the chiller controls will take the chiller off line for protection, and a manual reset will be required. Once the "near- trip" condition is corrected, the chiller will return to normal operation and can then produce full load cooling. 4. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts. a. Low chilled water temperature protection. b. High refrigerant pressure. c. Low oil flow protection. d. Loss of chilled water flow. e. Contact for remote emergency shutdown. f. Motor current overload. g. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 10 h. Over/under voltage. i. Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller. j. Compressor status (on or off). 5. Provide the following operating controls: a. A variable method to control capacity in order to maintain leaving chilled water temperature based on PI algorithms. Five minute solid state anti- recycle timer to prevent compressor from short cycling. Compressor minimum stop-to-start time limit shall be 2 minutes. If a greater than 5 minute start-to-start, or greater than 2 minute stop-to-start timer is included, hot gas bypass shall be provided to insure accurate chilled water temperature control in light load applications. b. Chilled water pump output relay that closes when the chiller is given a signal to start. c. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature to prevent nuisance trip outs. d. High ambient unloader pressure controller that unloads compressors to keep head pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip outs on days when outside ambient is above design. e. Compressor current sensing unloader unit that unloads compressors to help prevent current overload nuisance trip outs. f. Auto lead-lag functions that constantly even out run hours and compressor starts automatically. If contractor cannot provide this function then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so owner can be instructed by the contractor on how to manually change lead-lag on compressors and even out compressor starts and running hours. g. Low ambient lockout control with adjustable setpoint. h. Condenser fan sequencing which adjusts the speed of all fans automatically in response to ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure differential thereby optimizing unit efficiency. 6. Provide user interface that displays chilled water temperature setpoint and actual leaving chilled water temperature. Display should be on the front of panel. If display is on the inside of the panel, then a control display access door shall be provided to allow access to the display without removal of panels. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 11 I. Sound 1. At full load chiller sound pressure shall not exceed 70 dBA (Taylor Building) 71 dBA (Central Energy Facility) A-weighted at 30 feet from the side of the unit. Submitted sound data shall be in accordance with AHRI 370. a. If manufacturer cannot meet this sound specification then sound attenuation devices and/or barrier walls must be field installed at the contractor’s expense to meet the specified level. J. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers: 1. Trane, Trane Company, Salt Lake City, Utah (801) 486-0500. Attention, Jason Bradford. 2.3 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER (Kimball Building Data Center) A. General Unit Description 1. Factory assembled, single-piece chassis, air-cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the package shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, and refrigerant charge (HFC-410A). 2. Unit shall be capable of operation down to 20˚F. B. Cabinet 1. Frame shall be heavy-gage, with a powder coated paint finish. 2. Units shall be constructed of a galvanized steel frame with galvanized steel panels and access doors. Component surfaces shall be finished with a powder-coated paint. The coating or paint system shall withstand a 500-consecutive-hour salt spray application in accordance with standard ASTMB117. C. Compressors 1. Fully hermetic scroll type compressors with R410A optimized and dedicated scroll profile. 2. Direct drive motor cooled by suction gas and a completely enclosed compression chamber which leads to increased efficiency. 3. Each compressor shall have overload protection internal to the compressor 4. Each compressor shall include: centrifugal oil pump, oil level sight glass and oil charging valve. 5. Each compressor will have crankcase heaters installed and properly sized to minimize the amount of liquid refrigerant present in the oil sump during off cycles. D. Evaporator 1. The evaporator shall be a high efficiency, brazed plate-to-plate type heat exchanger consisting of parallel plates. Braze plates shall be stainless steel with copper braze material. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 12 2. The evaporator shall be protected with an etched foil heater and covered with insulation. This combination shall provide freeze protection down to -30F ambient temperatures while the heater is powered. Contractor shall provide separate power to energize heater and protect evaporator while chiller is disconnected. 3. The water side working pressure shall be rated at 150 psig and tested at 1.5 times maximum allowable water side working pressure. 4. The refrigerant side working pressure shall be rated at 460 psig and tested at 1.1 maximum allowable refrigerant side working pressure. E. Condenser 1. Construct condenser coils of microchannel all aluminum brazed fin construction. The condenser coils shall have an integral sub-cooling circuit and shall be designed for at least 650 psig working pressure. Leak tested at 715 psig. Coils can be cleaned with high pressure water. 2. The maximum allowable working pressure of the condenser shall be 650 psig. The condensers shall be factory proof and leak tested at 715 psig. 3. Low Sound Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct drive, corrosion resistant glass fiber reinforced composite blades molded into a low noise fan blade. 4. Low speed fan motors shall be three-phase with permanently lubricated ball bearings and individually protected by circuit breakers. 5. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures from 32F to 125F. 6. Provide coil protection for shipping. Entire condenser coil shall be covered with heavy plastic to prevent inadvertent damage to coil during shipment or rigging. F. Enclosures 1. Mount starters in a UL1995 rated panel for outdoor use. 2. The starter shall be across-the-line configuration, factory-mounted and fully pre- wired to the compressor motor(s) and control panel. 3. Unit shall have a single point power connection. 4. A control power transformer shall be factory-installed and factory-wired to provide unit control power. 5. Control panel shall be dead front construction for enhanced service technician safety. 6. Power line connection type shall be standard with a terminal block. G. Refrigeration Components 1. Each refrigerant circuit shall include a filter drier, electronic expansion valve with site glass, liquid line service valves and a complete operating charge of both refrigerant HFC-410A and compressor oil. 2. Each refrigerant circuit shall include a discharge line service valve to allow the refrigerant to be isolated in the condenser. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 13 H. Controls, Safeties and Diagnostics 1. The microprocessor-based unit controller shall be factory-installed and factory- tested. 2. The unit display shall provide the following data: a. Water and air temperatures b. Refrigerant levels and temperatures c. Flow switch status d. Compressor starts and run times 3. The unit controller shall provide chilled water reset based on return water as an energy saving option. 4. Chilled water temperature control shall be microprocessor-based, proportional and integral controller to show water and refrigerant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and diagnostics. This microprocessor-based controller is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. Controls shall include the following readouts and diagnostics: a. Low evaporator refrigerant temperature and/or pressure b. High condenser refrigerant pressure c. Motor current overload d. High compressor discharge temperature e. Electronic distribution faults: phase loss, phase imbalance, or phase reversal 5. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed. 6. On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control wiring, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformer and a single 115 volt 60 Hz single phase connection for evaporator freeze protection heaters. 7. Provide single 115 volt 60 Hz single phase connection for evaporator freeze protection heaters. 8. The unit controller shall utilize a microprocessor that will automatically take action to prevent unit shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with: evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condensing pressure and motor current overload. 9. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts. a. Low chilled water temperature protection. b. High refrigerant pressure. c. Low oil flow protection. d. Loss of chilled water flow. e. Contact for remote emergency shutdown. f. Motor current overload. g. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing. h. Over/under voltage. i. Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller. j. Compressor status (on or off). 10. Provide the following operating controls: a. Chilled water pump output relay that closes when the chiller is given a signal to start. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 14 b. High ambient pressure controller that shuts off a compressor to keep head pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip outs on days when outside ambient is above design. c. Compressor current sensing limit that shuts off a compressor to help prevent current overload nuisance trips. d. Auto lead-lag functions that constantly even out run hours and compressor starts automatically. If contractor cannot provide this function then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so owner can be instructed by the contractor on how to manually change lead-lag on compressors and even out compressor starts and running hours. e. Low ambient lockout control with adjustable setpoint. Set at 20˚F. 11. Provide user interface that displays chilled water temperature setpoint and actual leaving chilled water temperature. Display should be on the front of panel. If display is on the inside of the panel, then a control display access door shall be provided to allow access to the display without removal of panels. I. Chilled Fluid Circuit -- with optional integrated evaporator water pump 1. Chilled fluid circuit shall be rated for 150 psig (10.34 bar) working pressure. 2. Proof of flow switch shall be factory installed the correct number of pipe diameters from any elbow and in the correct orientation. In addition, the flow switch shall be factory wired. 3. Flow switch shall be IFM flow monitor type. 4. A 16 mesh water strainer shall be factory provided and installed with a blow down valve to facilitate periodic cleaning of the strainer to prevent it from becoming clogged. 5. A buffer tank shall be factory installed and engineered for continuous flow. a. Tank construction shall be welded steel and tank shall be powder coated. b. Tank shall be fully insulated and designed with freeze protection down to -30°F. c. The tank shall be rated with a waterside working pressure of 150 psig and tested at 225 psig. d. Water pipe extensions shall be grooved pipe and factory installed from the evaporator to the edge of the unit. J. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers: 1. Trane, Trane Company, Salt Lake City, Utah (801) 486-0500. Attention, Jason Bradford. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Flow Switches - Provided by Chiller Manufacturer for chilled water proof of flow. B. External Temperature Sensor – Provided by Chiller Manufacturer for chilled water temperature control. C. Interface Panel – Provide chiller with Bacnet based interface panel to provide complete communication with building automation systems. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR COOLED CHILLERS 236400 – 15 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install flow switches on chilled water system. B. Install per manufacturers requirements. C. Install level on rubber-in-shear isolators. 3.2 FACTORY STARTUP A. Start-up Service 1. Manufacturer shall provide following service without cost to Owner - a. Complete operating instructions. b. Five days minimum service of a factory-trained representative who shall 1) Supervise leak testing and charge with refrigerant. 2) Supervise adjusting of units and controls. 3) Place units in service. 4) Require deficiencies to be corrected. 5) Certify to Engineer that installation meets Manufacturer's requirements. 2. Provide separate startup service for each chiller. Startup of each chiller may be at different times. 3. Provide annual preventative maintenance inspections for two years including oil analysis. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DRY COOLERS 236533 – 1 SECTION 236533 – DRY COOLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install a dry cooler as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties 2. Division 260000 - a. Furnishing and installing power wiring, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and power wiring to starters. b. Furnishing and installing all interconnecting control wiring between dry cooler control panel, remote control items, including temperature sensors, and control wiring external to unit for the control system, and installation of control components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. NSI/ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings. C. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code SEC VIII, Division 1. D. UL 1995 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. E. ANSI/AFBMA 9-1978 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life F. IASTM B117 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing G. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products H. ASTM A525 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Sheet Steel Products I. ASTM D1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens, Subjected to Corrosive Environments 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. The manufacturer of the dry cooler shall have a minimum of five years experience in the production of these units. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DRY COOLERS 236533 – 2 B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. A firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on projects with dry coolers similar to that required for project. C. Acoustics: 1. The manufacturer of the dry cooler shall provide outdoor sound power level data across all major octave band center frequencies for cataloged operating range of unit at gross cooling capacity range. Data shall be obtained in conformance with ANSI S1.32-1980, American National Standard Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Discrete Frequency and Narrow Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms and per AMCA Standard 300-85 test code "Sound Rating Air Moving Devices". D. Guarantees: 1. The system shall have a limited warranty for one full year from substantial completion. E. Maintenance Services 1. Furnish complete service and maintenance of dry cooler units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion by contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: 1. Submit overall dimension drawings, field wiring diagram, and product data including water flow, pressure drops, total power consumption, water entering and leaving conditions under all operating modes. 2. Basis of unit selection and performance with supporting documentation to be furnished shop drawings. Guaranteed maximum annual operating cost to be supplied with bid. B. Shop Drawings: 1. In tight areas, submit scaled layout drawings of proposed equipment installation. C. Record Drawings: 1. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed equipment, in accordance with requirements of Division 01 and Section 230000. D. Maintenance Data: 1. Electrical wiring diagrams, installation and maintenance instructions and an owner's manual shall be supplied with each unit. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handle unit carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Damaged units or damaged components shall not be installed. Replace all damaged parts with new parts from the manufacturer. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DRY COOLERS 236533 – 3 B. If unit is to be stored prior to installation store in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading the unit and moving it to the final location. 1.6 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Training 1. At completion of project, dry cooler manufacturer’s factory representative shall provide 2 hours of training to Owner. 2. Schedule with the Owner a minimum of seven days prior to training. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Materials And Valves - As specified in Division 23. 2.2 DRY COOLER A. General: Complete factory assembled wired and tested dry air fluid cooler. Unit shall be designed to meet scheduled capacities using Propylene Glycol/Water Mixture. 1. Corrosion resistant construction - Mill galvanized housing, powder coated steel fan guards, galvanized steel fan blades. Low speed, fully guarded fans for quiet operation. 2. Built-in lifting eyes. 3. Factory assembled legs. 4. 850 RPM fans maximum. 5. Compartmented fans to prevent short circuiting of air during fan cycling. 6. Each unit shall be complete with fan cycling controls. 7. Vertical cabinet design. 8. Coil shall be constructed of 5/8" diameter seamless copper tubes, and aluminum plate fins, with self-spacing collars. 9. Coil shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction without damage to coils. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DRY COOLERS 236533 – 4 10. Foot-mounted direct drive fan motors with moisture protected rainshields. Motors shall internal overload protection and be rated for 150°F maximum air temperature over the motor. 11. Weatherproof electrical enclosure shall include single point field wiring connection. 12. Provide with factory mounted and wired fused disconnect. 13. Provide with factory wired fan cycle/fan speed control. 14. Provide with Bacnet interface B. Sound 1. At full load dry cooler, sound pressure shall not exceed 60 dBA A-weighted at 30 feet from the side of the unit. Submitted sound data shall be in accordance with AHRI 370. C. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers: 1. Colmac Coil 2. Liebert 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. External Temperature Sensor – Provided by dry cooler Manufacturer for chilled water temperature control. B. Interface Panel – Provide dry cooler with Bacnet based interface panel to provide complete communication with building automation systems. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temperature sensors on chilled water system. B. Install per manufacturers requirements. C. Install level on rubber-in-shear isolators. 3.2 FACTORY STARTUP A. Start-up Service 1. Manufacturer shall provide following service without cost to Owner - 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DRY COOLERS 236533 – 5 a. Complete operating instructions. b. Two days minimum service of a factory-trained representative who shall 1) Supervise adjusting of units and controls. 2) Place units in service. 3) Require deficiencies to be corrected. 4) Certify to Engineer that installation meets Manufacturer's requirements. 2. Provide annual preventative maintenance inspections for one year. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ICE STORAGE UNITS 237119 – 1 SECTION 237119 – ICE STORAGE UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install Ice Storage Units, (Thermal Energy Storage Units) as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping and Specialties 2. Division 260000 – a. Furnishing and installing all interconnecting control wiring between ice banks, ice inventory meter, control panel, remote control items, including temperature sensors, and control wiring external to unit for the control system, and installation of control components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME D 638-08 B. NSI/ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings. C. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code SEC VIII, Division 1. D. UL 1995 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. E. ANSI/AFBMA 9-1978 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life F. IASTM B117 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing G. ASTM D1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens, Subjected to Corrosive Environments 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. The manufacturer of the Ice Storage Units shall have a minimum of five years experience in the production of these units. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ICE STORAGE UNITS 237119 – 2 B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. A firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on projects with ice storage only for project. C. Guarantees: 1. The system shall have a limited warranty for one full year from substantial completion. D. Maintenance Services 1. Furnish complete service and maintenance of Ice Storage Units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion by contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: 1. Submit overall dimension drawings, field wiring diagram, and product data including water flow, pressure drops, total power consumption, water entering and leaving conditions under all operating modes. 2. Basis of unit selection and performance with supporting documentation to be furnished shop drawings. Guaranteed maximum annual operating cost to be supplied with bid. B. Shop Drawings: 1. In tight areas, submit scaled layout drawings of proposed equipment installation. C. Record Drawings: 1. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed equipment, in accordance with requirements of Division 01 and Section 230000. D. Maintenance Data: 1. Control wiring diagrams, installation and maintenance instructions and an owner's manual shall be supplied with each unit. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ICE STORAGE UNITS 237119 – 3 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handle unit carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Damaged units or damaged components shall not be installed. Replace all damaged parts with new parts from the manufacturer. B. If unit is to be stored prior to installation store in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading the unit and moving it to the final location. 1.6 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Training 1. At completion of project, Ice Storage Unit manufacturer’s factory representative shall provide 2 hours of training to Owner. 2. Schedule with the Owner a minimum of seven days prior to training. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pipe Materials And Valves - As specified in Division 23. 2.1 ICE STORAGE UNITS: A. General: The thermal storage system shall be modular in design so that its capacity can be increased at any time by increments. It shall be a closed circuit system including package glycol chiller unit(s) and separate modular ice storage tanks as indicated on the plans. The chiller and ice storage tanks shall be provided by a single organization. This local organization shall have factory trained service technicians who will be responsible for the start-up and first year service for the system. The thermal storage system equipment must have been employed in at least 20 systems of 500 ton-hours or more capacity, all of which have operated successfully for five years. B. Ice Storage Tanks: 1. General: The ice storage tanks shall be designed for a minimum 25 year service life and shall be constructed solely of corrosion-resistant materials. It shall consist basically of a cylindrical container, spiral tubular heat exchanger and supply and return headers. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 1 SECTION 26 0501 - COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. 4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide following information for each item of equipment: a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings. c. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number. e. Name of local supplier. 2. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 3. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets) B. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. B. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable to this Division. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 2 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain informa-tion listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project. 1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items: a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. b. Letter of 1-year guarantee of workmanship. c. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings. d. Copy of letter verifying owner’s receipt of spare parts. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Con- tractor: “The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to re- place or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance.” 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked-up prints shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 3 B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough-in. a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplates current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 1 SECTION 26 0502 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26051 – Common Electrical Requirements 2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. C. Carefully remove all existing ceiling devices and light fixtures located on identified ceilings to be replaced. clean, store and reinstall on and/or in new ceilings and reconnect. EC shall recertify existing fire alarm system to the satisfaction of the local AHJ. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform drilling, cutting, block-offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect. B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re-used back to next active fixture, device, or junction box. C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 1 SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE PART 1 - 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C). c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. 3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C. 4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System: 1) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B. 3) Yellow: Phase C. 4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 2 B. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non- hardening sealant. C. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors: 1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors. 2. Acceptable Products: a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6000. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts): 1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits. b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation. C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use. D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices: 1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Burndy b. Thomas & Betts. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2 B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following. 1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system. 4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards. 5. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures. C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical continuity. D. Provide concrete-encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet minimum of No. 2/0 bare copper conductor in concrete footing, 2 inches minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper conductor to main panel as shown on Drawings. E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service disconnect. F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures. H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor. I. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. 1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. 2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings. J. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet. K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with bolted solderless lug. L. Do not bond neutral conductor of emergency generator set to set frame at generator location. M. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary neutral conductor to cabinet. N. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest ground per NEC and local inspector. O. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate ground at board on a grounding bar. P. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3 ground is not acceptable. Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to ground system. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1 SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. 3. Furnish and install air / vapor barrier back boxes as described in Contract Documents. 4. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with telephone company requirements. 5. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Raceway And Conduit: 1. Sizes: a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use. b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: a) Not subject to damage. b) Not in contact with earth. c) Not in concrete. 2) Flexible steel conduit or metal-clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment. c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: 1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. d. Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2 e. Pre-wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches. 3. Prohibited Raceway Materials: a. Aluminum conduit. b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. 2. EMT: a. Compression type. b. Steel set screw housing type. 3. PVC Conduit: a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. 5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. 6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper. 7. Prohibited Fitting Materials: a. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings. b. Cast set-screw fittings for EMT. c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. C. Outlet Boxes: 1. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. 2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16” square deep box with single gang mud ring. D. Air / Vapor Barrier Back Boxes: Pre-molded polyethylene fitting between framing members and inhibiting air / vapor infiltration and exfiltration around recessed outlet boxes. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com. 2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com. 3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. 4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com. 7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough-in. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions. B. Conduit And Raceway: 1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor. 8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings. 9. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation break (SIB) joints. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4 10. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls. 11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush. 12. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 13. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of exit from planting areas. 14. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 15. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. c. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. C. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier. 8. Location: a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall be within 6 inches of door jamb. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 5 b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural features. c. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1 SECTION 26 0553-ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types not approved. C. Conductor-color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard doors. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2 E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each coverplate. Use a permanent black marker. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule. System Voltage Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Neutral White with White orange stripe Grounding Green Green Isolated Ground Green with Green with yellow stripe yellow stripe Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify source to device and the load it serves, including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served and source. E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 1 SECTION 26 2816-DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disconnect switches. B. Enclosures. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for disconnect switches. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 26 0526 - Grounding. B. In the event of conflict regarding individually enclosed low-voltage protective device requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switch); 1. Square D Company 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES A. General: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide: 1. Heavy duty switches on 240 and/0r 600 volt rated circuits. 2. HP rated switches on all motor circuits. 2.03 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three phase with solid neutral as required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating handle which is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. 2.04 FUSES A. Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10 installed but not less than three of any one type and size. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings. B. Install disconnects plumb. C. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF (Above Finished Floor). D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of connections for disconnects. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 1 SECTION 26 2913-MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of motor starter in this section include the following: 1. AC Fraction horsepower Manual Starters 2. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters 3. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 4. AC Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for motor controls. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. B. In the event of conflict regarding motor starters requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter): 1. Allen-Bradley Company 2. General Electric Company 3. Square D Company 2.02 MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES A. For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not more than 5 units of each type, for both power and control circuit fuses. 2.03 MOTOR STARTERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published information, and as required for complete installations. B. Thermal Overload Units: Provide thermal overload units, sized in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for full load current of motor controlled. Provide thermal heater units, sized to actual running full load current if actual full load current is less than 90 percent of motor nameplate full load current. Size heater for mechanical equipment 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 2 after air and water balancing have been completed. Spare parts: Provide a spare set of each type and/or size. C. AC Fractional HP Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide manual, single-phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC max, fractional HP motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for protection of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1 HP, see Line Voltage Manual Starters specified herein.) Provide starter with quick-make, quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock-off toggle operated handle. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide flush mounted units with coverplate to match wiring device coverplates. D. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide line voltage manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green pilot light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted units. E. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8536): Provide line voltage magnetic starters (nothing smaller than size 1 - typical all arrangements), to types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max, 120 bolt control voltage with thermal overload protection and under voltage trip in all phases. Equip units with holding contact, 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted otherwise. Provide fused control transformer in each starter. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. Equip all spare starters complete with items as specified herein. F. AC Combination Non-Reversing Breaker and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics as indicated for 8536; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts max with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit protector. 1. Provide instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. G. AC Combination Non-Reversing Fused Disconnect and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, and electrical characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide quick-make, quick-break, visible blade disconnect switch. Provide 2, 3, and 4; and visible blade, automatic circuit interrupters with push-to-trip feature and separate fuse clips for larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters with dual-element (time-delay) fuses equal to 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 3 Bussman FRN/FRS. Provide combination starters for individualmounting, or for group mounting in motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA’s “Standards of Installation”, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. C. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. D. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. E. Each motor starter shall be equipped with lock out capabilities. F. Subsequent to wire/care hook-up energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ICE STORAGE UNITS 237119 – 4 Each tank shall have factory rated and published charge and discharge performance curves. The tanks shall be suitable for installation above ground. The tanks produce a floor loading of no more than 388 lbs./sq.ft. Each Ice Storage unit shall be capable of being isolated form the thermal storage system so that service may be performed without interrupting the operation of the entire cooling system. 2. Tank Container: The tank container shall be cylindrical and shall be constructed of polyethylene with an average thickness of 3/8 inch and a minimum ultimate strength of 2600 psi per ASTM D 638-08. The tank shall be able to withstand total freezing of the water within it through repeated cycles without damage. The bottom and sides of the tank shall be insulated with a R-factor of 9 and the top shall be insulated with a R-factor of 16. Insulation on the interior tank wall is unacceptable. Standby losses must not exceed one percent of the total stored capacity over an 85ºF day. The sides of the tank shall be covered with 0.032 inch textured aluminum sheet. The tank container shall be repairable without removing the tubular heat exchanger. The tank container shall be warranted for a period of 10 years. 3. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall contain a spiral-wound, mat type heat exchanger consisting of polyethylene tubing arranged in multiple parallel circuits with opposite direction of flow in adjoining tubes. The heat exchanger shall be capable of operating up to a 90 psi maximum pressure and shall have a minimum burst pressure rated for 4 times the maximum operating pressure. Each ice tank heat exchanger and its associated piping shall be factory hydrostatically-pressure tested to a minimum of 250 psi (1724 kPa) after tank insertion, not prior. Multiple thermal storage modules shall be installed so flow is uniform in all tanks, using balance valves reverse return headering system. A pressure difference variation of one foot across any of the tanks in the system shall not cause more than a 3% imbalance in any tank’s flow as compared to any other. The heat exchanger must be repairable without removal from tank. 4. Piping System: The system shall be filled with a coolant solution of 35% propylene glycol. The solution shall be thoroughly mixed in a separate container before it is put into the system. System leak protection shall be provided by liquid level and/or pressure switches in the expansion tank. Tank bottoms shall be level and supported over their entire area. All system piping and flexible hoses shall be field insulated by others. Tanks shall have 36 inches of unobstructed overhead clearance for service. 5. Ice Inventory Meter: The thermal storage system shall be provided with an ice inventory measuring device which will indicate the amount of ice available at any 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ICE STORAGE UNITS 237119 – 5 time within an accuracy of +5 percent. The ice inventory meter shall consist of an insertion probe which connects to the storage tanks and is supplied with air by an air pump, the output pressure of this air pump being measured by an analog meter and an electric transducer giving a 4-20 milliamp output. The input to the meter shall be 120 volts/60 Hertz AC. C. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers: a. Colmac 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. External Temperature Sensor – Provided by Ice storage Unit Manufacturer ice monitoring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temperature sensors for ice monitors. B. Install per manufacturers requirements. 3.2 FACTORY STARTUP A. Start-up Service 1. Manufacturer shall provide following service without cost to Owner - a. Complete operating instructions. b. Two days minimum service of a factory-trained representative who shall 1) Supervise adjusting of units and controls. 2) Place units in service. 3) Require deficiencies to be corrected. 4) Certify to Engineer that installation meets Manufacturer's requirements. 2. Provide annual preventative maintenance inspections for one year. END OF SECTION 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup- plementary Conditions apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Removing existing vegetation. 2. Clearing and grubbing. 3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for site demolition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in dis- turbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in- place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or other- wise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining con- struction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage condi- tions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdic- tion. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises Insert location. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is locat- ed before site clearing. D. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent prop- erties and walkways, according to erosion and sedimentation control. Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas dis- turbed during removal. 3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. D. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with appli- cable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safe- ty and security and utilities sections and Section 024119 "Selective Demolition." 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installa- tion of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 3. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underly- ing subsoil or other waste materials. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SITE CLEARING 311000 - 4 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indi- cated to be stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw- cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent exist- ing pavement. Saw- cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Own- er's property. END OF SECTION 311000 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1 SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls. 2. Warning Tape B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over bedding to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and cement concrete. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Bedrock: for the purposes of this Project, Overlying reasonably solid layer of volcanic rock, approximately 2 to 3 feet thick, or the volcanic rock under this solid layer that is generally very jointed, fractured and broken into boulder and cobble-sized particles which is still intact, with few, in any, significantly thick fractures or seams filled with soil. E. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. F. Drainage Fill or Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. G. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. a. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. H. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf; measured according to SAE J- 1179.Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a general- purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. J. Structures: footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. K. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement meeting a specific gradation. L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Filter fabric. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 B. NOT USED C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. D. NOT USED E. Preexcavation Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data indicating subsurface conditions has been made available to the Contractor for convenience and may not serve as a reliable representations of site conditions. All locations that may require excavation may not have been probed. The Owner will not be held responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the provided data. B. Excavation Requirements: Extend building excavations below slabs to levels specified. Remove loose, fractured, or disturbed pieces of bedrock along near-vertical faces if applicable. 1. Where horizontal surfaces of bedrock exceed slope of 1 foot rise per 10 feet at base of excavations, either step or flatten surface of bedrock. C. Site Utility Information: Record data on known existing utilities is indicated on the Drawings and has not been verified. Contractor will confirm actual locations of existing utilities and identify possible coordination requirements. D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Contractor and University not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. E. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed (if any). Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 5 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter as approved by soils inspector. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, 6 inch minus uncrushed aggregate base. 1. Uncrushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 6 inch 100 % No. 4 15% - 60% No. 200 0 - 5% 2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion passing the No. 40 sieve. 3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be less than 25. 4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6. 5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 25. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone, and or crushed sand; 3/4 minus crushed aggregate base. 1. Crushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 % 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 3/4 inch 90% - 100% No. 4 40% - 65% No. 8 30% - 50% No. 200 3% - 9% 2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion passing the No. 40 sieve. 3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be less than 25. 4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6. 5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 30. F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. NOT USED H. Drainage Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. NOT USED K. Structural Backfill: well graded 4 inch minus granular material as approved by testing agency. L. Fill and Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials. 2.2 FILTER FABRIC A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1 . Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2 . Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3 . Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 4 . Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833.Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.1 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours’ exposure; ASTM 4355 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 2.3 NOT USED 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape (If Required): Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows unless indicated otherwise in Campus standards (Verify with Campus standards): 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Data/Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7 A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross- sectioned by Engineer. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. B. Over-Excavation Requirements: All footings are intended to bear on sound bedrock. Where over-excavation occurs, footings may be poured thicker or the foundation walls may be extended as approved by Engineer. Over-excavated areas below concrete slabs are to be filled with engineered compact fill. It is the responsibility of the contractor to confirm existing subgrade elevations and provide additional fill and/or concrete where required and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 1 foot. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Clean bottom of excavation and place lean- mix concrete fill. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing lean-mix concrete fill. 2. Excavation for Underground Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 6 inches. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.5 NOT USED 3.6 NOT USED 3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Soils Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Owner determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Authorized additional excavation will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices as indicated herein. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 8 additional compensation. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2000 psi, may be used when approved by Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Engineer. 2. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Engineer. 3. Unauthorized excavations are to be at no cost to the Owner or Engineer. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Stockpile where directed by Owner. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Accepted construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork where required. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.11 NOT USED 3.12 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 9 B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material or satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material fill. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 NOT USED 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. D. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 3.16 GRADING 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 10 A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch Insert tolerance. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs- on-grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile filter fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer. 2018 CHILLER REPLACEMENT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO EARTH MOVING 312000 - 11 D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil off site. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000